Prinect Signa Station

Prinect Signa Station - Reference
Prinect Signa Station

Reference
Edition March 2010

Order No. SZ.111.1543
ABC
ABC
Imprint/Company Address Copyright 2010 Heidelberger Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG Phone +49 (4 31) 3 86-0
Druckmaschinen AG. Dr.-Hell-Strasse Fax +49 (4 31) 3 86-13 80
No part of this book may be repro- D-24107 Kiel http://www.heidelberg.com/
duced without prior written per-
mission.
.............................................................................................
Acrobat, Adobe, the Acrobat logo, Heidelberg, Heidelberg GTO 46, Pantone, Inc. is the copyright
Adobe Illustrator, Adobe Type GTO 52, M-Offset, SM 52, SM 74 owner of color data and/or software
Manager, PageMaker, Photoshop and SP 72 are registered trade- which are licensed to Heidelberger
and PostScript are registered marks of Heidelberger Druckma- Druckmaschinen AG to distribute
trademarks, Extreme, OPI and schinen AG. for use only in combination with
TIFF are trademarks of Adobe Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Prinect Signa Station. PANTONE
Systems Incorporated. Windows 95, Windows 98, color data and/or software shall not
Adobe, the Clearly Adobe Imaging Windows XP, Windows NT, be copied onto another disk or into
logo, PostScript and Acrobat are Windows 2000 and memory unless as part of the execu-
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incor- Windows 2003 are registered tion of Prinect Signa Station.
porated. trademarks of Microsoft Corpora- Prinect, Prinect Printready System
Apple, the Apple logo, Apple- tion. and Prinect Printready are trade-
Talk, ColorSync, EtherTalk, marks of Heidelberger Druckm-
LaserWriter, Macintosh, Finder, PANTONE colors displayed in the aschinen AG
MacroMaker, PICT and Power software application or in the user Other company names, product
Macintosh are registered documentation may not match names and trademarks not
trademarks of Apple Computer PANTONE-identified standards. expressly mentioned in this man-
Incorporated. Consult current PANTONE color ual are trademarks or registered
publications exact color. trademarks of the corresponding
EPS is a registered trademark of PANTONE and other Pantone, Inc.
Altsys Corporation. manufacturers and fall within the
trademarks are the property of Pan- regulations regarding the protec-
EtherShare is a registered trade- tone, Inc. Pantone, Inc., 2002 tion of trademarks.
mark of Helios Software GmbH.
.............................................................................................
Important notice!
We are dedicated to improving and The information contained in this product described in this manual,
enhancing our products. Conse- manual about performance and please contact the agency which is
quently, the information in this speed as well as technical data con- responsible for you.
manual is subject to change with- cerning application of our products Order No. SZ.111.1543
out notice. is not legally binding as it does not
Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG constitute a written contract of fea- Edition March 2010
assumes no responsibility for infor- tures. Printed in Germany.
mation and description as far as If any problems occur with the
third-party products are concerned.
ABC Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Before You Start ...

About This Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXIII
What you should already know . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXIII
Further Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXIII
Symbols and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXIV
Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXIV
Interference to Monitors by Magnetic Fields . . . . . . . XXV
Open Source Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXV
Heidelberg online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXVI
1 What Is New?
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
What's New since Prinect Signa Station 4.5 . . . . . . . . 1-1
New Functions and Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
What's New since Prinect Signa Station 4.0 . . . . . . . . 1-7
New Functions and Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
What's New since Prinect Signa Station 3.0 . . . . . . . 1-10
New Functions and Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
2 The Heidelberg User Interface

Concept of the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Structure of the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
The Four Basic Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Browser Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Graphic Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Inspectors Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
List Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Folder Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Drop-down Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
List Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Prinect Signa Station Reference III

Table of Contents ABC
Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Option/Check Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Tool Button (On/Off Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Multitool Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Text Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Numeric Text Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
File Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Context-sensitive menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Help! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Contents/Full Text Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Forwards/Backwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
General Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Menu functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Browser Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Graphic Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Page Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Job Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Editing the Clip Path (Work Mode: Packaging) . . . . . . . 2-23
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
3 What's What?
Terms Used in Prinect Signa Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Product Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Master Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Folding Schemes (Schemes, Imposition Schemes) . . . . . . 3-2
Folding Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Plate templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Press Sheet (= Plate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
IV Edition March 2010

Paper (Printing Materials) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Subject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Assembly Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Tiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Bounding Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
4 Preferences / Getting Started

Preferences and Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Used Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
View Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Number of Recent Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Default User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Suppressed Message Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Default Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Select External Executables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Default Layer Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Surface Names (Press Sheets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Job File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Free Text Replacer Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
JDF Workflow with Prinect Prepress Manager . . . . . . . 4-12
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Bleed Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Defaults for folding sheet generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Several Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Switches for Marks Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Proof Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Arrow Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Default Screen Angles for RIPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Prinect Signa Station Reference V

Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Marks Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Default for Other Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Default for Report Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Default for Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Default for Footer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Page and Paper Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Attributes for Report Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Defaults for JDFConnector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Resources Default for JDFs with Job Prep Data . . . . . 4-26
Default Groups for Imports (JDF / Signa 9 Template) . 4-26
JDF Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
MDS (Master Data Store) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
PDF Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Preview Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
PDF Preview Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Attributes for HTML Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Output Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Option Chooser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
License Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Demo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
License Server (name or IP number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Refresh Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Basic Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Login Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Your First Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Job Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
VI Edition March 2010

5 Job Assistant
Basics about Job Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Starting the Job Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
New Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Edit Product Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Working with the Job Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Order of the Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
6 Browser Window
Browser Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Product Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Internal Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
7 Resources and Machines

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Creating Custom Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Job Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Product Part Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Plate Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Papers (Printing Materials) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Page and Paper Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Plate layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Customer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Output Parameter Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
User data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Report Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Prinect Signa Station Reference VII

Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Creating Custom Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Filmsetters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Platesetters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Sheetfed Presses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Web Presses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
8 Graphic Window
Graphic Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Graphic Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Measured Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Standard Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Front/Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Creating Internal Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Marks Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Text mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Creating an ink pickup bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Creating a cover mark and other internal marks . . . . . . 8-10
Press Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Functionality Using the Context-sensitive Menu . . . . . . . . 8-13
Display and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Folding Sheet/Assembly Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Display and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Measured Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
VIII Edition March 2010

Tile Front / Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Display the Marks Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Creating a Text Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Creating an ink pickup bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Creating a cover mark and other internal marks . . . . . . 8-28
Move Content Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Define line type for the clip path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Define cover mark from line type for glue area . . . . . . . 8-28
Clip Path Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
User-defined dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Page List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Functionality Using the Context-sensitive Menu . . . . . . . 8-30
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Pages per Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Press Sheet List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Display and Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Tool bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
All Press Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Display and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Measured Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Tool bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
9 Inspectors Window
Where You Can Select Inspectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Prinect Signa Station Reference IX

Details in the Inspectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Job Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Product Part Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Folding Sheet Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Assembly Block Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Press Sheet Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Page/1up Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Document Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Packaging Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Parameters of the Inspectors in
Prinect Signa Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
When Do I Use What? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Job Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Administrative Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Job from Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Job and customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Default for JDF and job ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Job Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Color Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Default Screen Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Product Part Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Product Part from Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Main Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Job Details in Product Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Work Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Start Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Pages in Product Part / Page Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Master Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
X Edition March 2010

Master Page Types and Trimmed Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Page-related Bleed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Custom Bleed and Trim Allowance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Segmented Folding Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Placement rule for assigned pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Binding Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Creeping and Bottling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Gripper Collator / Cover Bonding / Glue Line . . . . . . . 9-39
Parameters for Automatic Gap Computation . . . . . . . . 9-42
Cut Block Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Automatic Placement of Print Control Marks . . . . . . . 9-44
Notes on Using Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Marks Colors/Scaling and Collating Values . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Other General Marks Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Load Plates and Schemes from Product Part Template 9-47
List of Selected Plate Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Selected Plate Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Placement rule for perfecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Paper Definition for Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Subject Position on Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Page Assignment & Master Schemes (only for the
"Imposition" mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
List of Used Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Editing Schemes in the List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Active Inspector Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
Folding Sheet Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66
Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66
Folding Sheet Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66
Prinect Signa Station Reference XI

Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Marks List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
Selected Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72
Expert Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-77
Marks Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79
Assembly Block Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-80
Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
Assembly Block Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
1up Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-83
Placement rule for assigned 1ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84
Lenticular Printing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84
Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84
Marks Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-85
Press Sheet Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-85
Press Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-85
Management Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-85
Sheet Optimization (only in the "Montage"
working mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-86
Press Sheet Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-86
Folding Sheet/Assembly Block List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-87
Version Preallocated for Versioned Output
(Versioning Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-88
Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-88
Marks List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89
Selected Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90
Expert Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
Marks Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
Page/1up Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
Trimmed Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
Active Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-92
Version Preallocated for Versioned Output . . . . . . . . . 9-92
Bleed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-92
XII Edition March 2010

Clip path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93

Placement rule for assigned page/1up . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93
Creeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-95
Apply Rule to All Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-95
Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-95
Marks List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-96
Selected Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-97
Expert Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-97
Apply changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-97
Marks Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-98
Document Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-98
Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-98
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-98
Available colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-99
Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-99
Area of application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-99
Trimmed Size (Trim Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-100
Available colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-102
10 List Window
List Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Context-sensitive Menu Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Press Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Folding Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Page List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Assigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Not assigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Prinect Signa Station Reference XIII

11 Editors
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Plate Template Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Graphic Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Plate Template Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Plate Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Paper Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Imaging Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Marks Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Marks Resources Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Notes on Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Loading the "Plate Templates" Resource to the Job . . . . 11-10
Folding Scheme Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Folding Scheme Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Center offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Customize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Push Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Scheme Generated from Folding Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
Folding rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
Fold Assistant / folding sheet animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
Fold Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
Fold Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
Fold Assistant for Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28
Naming Used in the Standard Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29
Double Gate Fold as a Special Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30
Loading the "Schemes" Resource to the Job . . . . . . . . . 11-31
Marks Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
"General" Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
Graphic Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35
Tools for Creating Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35
Text Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36
XIV Edition March 2010

Text Mark Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38

"General" Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38
Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38
Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38
Creating a Text Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38
Placeholders for Text Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-39
Loading the "Marks" Resource to the Job . . . . . . . . . . . 11-45
Ink Pickup Bar Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46
"General" Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46
Graphic Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46
Color Control Bar Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-47
"General" Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-48
Graphic Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-48
Color Control Bar Special Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-49
"General" Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-50
Graphic Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-50
Loading the "Marks" Resource to the Job . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-51
Marks Import Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-51
"General" Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-51
Graphic Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-52
Marks Import Editor (Line Mark) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-52
"General" Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-53
Graphic Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-53
Combi Marks Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-53
"General" Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-54
More details for marks with AutoClip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-54
Graphic Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-54
Paper Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-55
Loading the "Papers (Printing Materials)" Resource
to the Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-55
Prinect Signa Station Reference XV

Format Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-56

Loading the "Page and Paper Sizes" Resource
to the Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-56
Plate Layout Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-56
Customer Data Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-56
Loading the "Customer Data" Resource to the Job . . . . . 11-57
Output Parameter Set Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-57
"General" Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-57
Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-59
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-59
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-60
Visual Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-60
Proof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-60
Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-61
OPP and OPC parameter sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-61
Imaging Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-61
Back Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-63
Punches Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-63
Tiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-63
Punch format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-63
Finishing tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-65
Output folder for PPF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-65
Report Output Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-66
Saddlestitcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-66
Finishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-67
Loading the "Output Parameter Sets" Resource
to the Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-67
User Data Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-68
Report Templates Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-68
Graphic Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-69
Tools for the Report Templates Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-69
Filmsetter and Platesetter Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-70
Loading the "Filmsetter / Platesetter" to the Job . . . . . . 11-72
XVI Edition March 2010

Sheetfed Press Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-72

Loading the "Sheetfed Press" to the Job . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-73
Web Press Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-73
12 Menus in Prinect Signa Station

File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Open ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Open with Browser ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
New ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Create Resource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
New Plate Template... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
New Scheme... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
New Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
New Paper... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
New Format... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
New Plate Layout... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
New Customer Data... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
New Output Parameter Set... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
New User Data... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
New Report Header... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Create Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
New Filmsetter Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
New Platesetter Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
New Sheetfed Press Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
New Web Press Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Documents ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Import Job ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
JDF... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Import Signa Resources... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Marks Import Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Resource / Machine ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Paper or Customer Resource by CSV ... . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
JDF ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Prinect Signa Station Reference XVII

Preferences ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15

Export ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Export Job... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Export Job for Service... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Export Signa Resources... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Recent Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Save as ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Last Version... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Print Job ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Print Assistant ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Preferences ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Logoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
Jobs & Resources Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
Current Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
Active Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
Resources & Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
Plate Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Inspectors Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Job Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Product Part Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Press Sheet Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
Page/1up Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
Document Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
XVIII Edition March 2010

Background Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23

Show Output Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
Status of JDFConnector Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
Detach/Include Graphic View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
Folding Sheet Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
Folding Sheet Animation with Data Pages . . . . . . . . . 12-27
3D Collating Mark Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28
3D Reader's Spread Visualization with Data Pages . . 12-30
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31
About Prinect Signa Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32
Remote Service... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32
Current User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32
13 Packaging
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Definition of the "Packaging" Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Job Assistant in the "Packaging" Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Product Part Inspector - "Packaging" tab . . . . . . . . . 13-2
"Packaging" Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Cutting Die File and Main Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Information about Loaded CFF2 File ("Info") . . . . . . . . 13-3
Placement rule for assigned 1ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
"Attributes" Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
1up Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Editing the Clip Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Rectangular Clip Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Polygon Clip Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Functions in a 1up Context-sensitive Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Prinect Signa Station Reference XIX

"StationNumber" Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Step 1: Assigning the "StationNumber" mark
to the 1up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Step 2: Assigning the station numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
"Station Numbers" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Cover Marks (Job-internal Cover Mark /
"CoverClippath") . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Background Info about Cover Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Job-internal Cover mark ("InternalMark") . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
"CoverClippath" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Create Cover Mark from CAD Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Define cover mark from line type for glue area . . . . . . 13-21
Ink Pickup Bar with Measurement Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Notes on Generating CFF2 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
Browser Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
Overview: Changes in the "Packaging" Mode . . . . . . 13-26
14 Sheet Optimization
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Requirements for Creating a Job with Sheet
Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Creating Master Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Sheet Optimization in the Press Sheet Inspector: . . . 14-3
"Sheet Optimization" Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
"Ribbon Margin" Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Graphic of "Horizontal" Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Graphic of "Vertical" Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Graphic of "General" Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Folding Sheet/Assembly Block List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Display in the List Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Creating a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Concept for Optimization Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
XX Edition March 2010

Automatic Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12

Manual Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Functions for Manual Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Important Terms at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
15 Drag & Drop

What's Behind Drag-and-Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Using Drag-and-Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
From the Browser Window to the Graphic Window . . . . 15-2
From the List Window to the Graphic Window . . . . . . . 15-3
Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
From the Browser Window to the Inspectors Window . . 15-3
From the Inspectors Window to the Graphic Window . . 15-4
Files from the Operating System to the Browser Window . 15-5
Glossary
Index
Prinect Signa Station Reference XXI

ABC Before You Start ...
Before You Start ...
About This Documentation

This documentation applies to Prinect Signa Station
version 10.0.
This documentation is implemented as the context-
sensitive Help in the Prinect Signa Station applica-
tion and at the same time is a separate reference man-
ual. This means that you immediately have Help
online on the screen when you hit the F1 key or, if you
wish, you can read up on the information in the refer-
ence manual.
In this documentation you will learn ...
0
to work with Heidelberg's user interface,
0
to configure Prinect Signa Station optimally,
0
to create your first job with the available
resources,
0
each function in Prinect Signa Station works.
What you should already know

We assume that you are familiar with the basic func-
tions of Windows /Apple Macintosh. We assume
that you know the basics about reprographics and
printing.
Further Documentation
You will find more information in ...
0
Prinect Signa Station - User's Guide
0
Prinect Signa Station - Installation
Prinect Signa Station Reference XXIII

Before You Start ... ABC
Symbols and Styles

The following typographical conventions are used in
this manual:
0
References to other chapters and sections are blue
(on the screen) and underlined.
Example:
See Symbols and Styles, page XXIV.
0
Quotes are used to indicate menus, folders, names
of functions, hardware conditions, switch set-
tings, system messages, etc.
Example:
Set the switch to "off".
0
Menus, functions and submenus are separated
from one another by a ">".
Example:
Select "File > Open..."
0
A plus sign is used to indicate that several keys
have to be pressed at the same time.
Example:
Press Alt+A.
Important Information
Important information in the text is marked by sym-
bols that are used as follows:
Warning: Contains information that must be taken
3 into consideration to protect the user from injury.
Attention: Contains information that must be taken
1 into consideration to prevent damage to hardware or

software.
XXIV Edition March 2010

ABC Before You Start ...
Note: Contains important general or additional infor-

2 mation on a specific topic.
Prerequisites: This text contains requirements which
5 must be fulfilled before the steps which follow can be
performed.
Interference to Monitors by Magnetic Fields

Strong magnetic fields may influence your monitor
screen (for example, they might make the edges of
the screen unsteady or images flicker). This could be
caused by the 50 Hz magnetic field coming from the
power cables routed along your floors.
Recommended measures to eliminate these prob-
lems, taking into account the safety regulations for
workplaces with monitors in an office environment:
0
Move the monitor to a different location.
0
Shield the source (e.g. shield the cable duct).
0
Lay the power cables differently.
0
Screen the monitor using a metal hood.
Open Source Software

Some software libraries and other software programs
which form part of the scope of delivery of the Heidel-
berg software are applications from third-party pro-
viders. They are Open Source Software, for which the
granted rights of use are subject to the regulations
pertaining to the license agreements. Upon your writ-
ten order you can obtain a free and fully machine-
readable copy of the source code of such Open Source
Prinect Signa Station Reference XXV

Before You Start ... ABC
Software, in line with applicable provisions, from

Heidelberg. The costs for the data carrier, postage and
administration will be charged.
You can obtain a copy of the source code stating your
Heidelberg software version from:
Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG Service Hotline
Electronics
E-mail: GlobalExpertPress@heidelberg.com
Heidelberg online
Do you have any questions regarding our products?
Do you want to improve your workflow?
Then visit us on the Internet. You can find us at:
http://www.heidelberg.com/
XXVI Edition March 2010

ABC What Is New?
1 What Is New?
General
The new Prinect Signa Station software has a fully
new graphical user interface that is in tune with all
other Prinect products, making your work with it
consistent and easy.
Now we would like to highlight to you briefly what's
new compared to Prinect Signa Station versions 3.0,
4.0 and 4.5:
What's New since Prinect Signa Station 4.5
New Functions and Enhancements

0 Marks Import Assistant
New import wizard that automates the import of
new marks and the update of Dipco marks to a
great extent, thus making import much simpler.
More details are described in Marks Import Assis-
tant, page 127.
0 Segmented Folding Sheets (small-format, square
book).
New functions were added that include a simpler,
cost-effective production of small-format, square
books. More details can be found in Segmented
Folding Sheets, page 929.
0 In the "Montage" mode, lenticular printing is sup-
ported by new functions.
A lenticular image (line grid image) gives you,
among other things, a three-dimensional impres-
sion without the help of tools like 3D glasses.
You can enable these functions. See Show Check
Items for Lenticular Printing, page 45 for details.
Prinect Signa Station Reference 11

What Is New? ABC
0 Single Page for Folding Sheet ("Letterfold")

This function lets you assign the pages in a large
PDF document to a multiple-page folding scheme.
Based on the number of pages on the folding
sheet, folding marks are then set automatically,
the required folding calculated and CIP3/CIP4 data
can be passed on to finishing.
Production example: Three-page document with
fold-out pages, the PDF has one page.
More details are described in Single Page for Fold-
ing Sheet, page 927.
0 Gang run jobs from MIS
Gang run jobs can now be interpreted in conjunc-
tion with Prinect Prinance. More details can be
found in Import, page 424.
0 New functions for packaging printing
0 Create Cover Mark from CAD Lines
See the Create Cover Mark from CAD Lines,
page 1321.
0 Define cover mark from line type for glue area
See the Define cover mark from line type for
glue area, page 1321.
0 Moving the content with the mouse pointer
See the Move Content Data, page 828.
0 Set default position of the mark with the mea-
surement tool. You will find a description in
"Working with Marks" in the User's Guide.
0 Handling line type 99
See the Packaging: Treat Line Type 99 as Cut,
page 416.
12 Edition March 2010

ABC What Is New?
0 Product Part Inspector

0 Enhancement in the definition of a glue line.
See the Glue Line, page 941.
0 You can now also use frame values in the Prod-
uct Part Inspector.
0 Enhanced print dialog
0 For an output to the Prinect workflow it is now
possible to select single press sheets and assess
them individually by selecting "View". See Print
Job ..., page 1217 for details.
0 You can also save a JDF file in the interactive
workflow. See Print Job ..., page 1217 for
details.
0 Marks handling was enhanced by the following
functions:
0 Print marks without knockout setting
See "Background Colors":, page 1132.
0 Ink pickup areas consisting of several colors
Packaging printing in particular requires that
inking areas must be placed in the background
for pickup. The press can also control ink zones
that have low amounts of ink application.
Ink pickup bars must be printed one on top of
the other to save space or because there is usu-
ally is not enough space. Another criterion is
the amount of ink that can be applied without
smudging. In this case, it is necessary to be able
to specify the ink coverage of each single color
separately.
More details are described in Ink Pickup Bar
Editor, page 1146.

What Is New? ABC
0 Show Color Name in Strip

The color names are written to the strip.
0 Color control of marks without color
In packaging printing especially, station num-
bers, punch waste numbers etc, can often be
placed on very dark, sometimes multicolored
backgrounds. As a result, these marks cannot
be seen because of the way they are presently
overprinted in principle. In this respect, you
must be able to edit the mark.
You must be able to set a mark on a number of
color layers but not on all of them. You must be
able to define color layers as knockout.
A box was added at all places where it is possi-
ble to control the color of the marks in Prinect
Signa Station. This box lets you set and change
the color code.
You can find an example of this is handled in
Color, page 972 in "Color".
0 "Mirror Mark"
Details can be found in the Marks Editor in
"Mirror Mark":, page 1134.
0 "AutoClip Mark"
"AutoClip Mark", page 1134.
0 "Copy Mark to Front Only"
"Copy Mark to Front Only", page 1135.
0 After you create a frame with the "Frame" tool,
you can position a mark exactly at the starting
point of the frame with the help of the "Folder"

ABC What Is New?
button. See "Working with Marks" in the User's

Guide for details.
0 Placeholders
To make it easier for you to grasp which placehold-
ers are concerned, the implemented placeholders
now not only display their variable names (e.g.
"[jobid]") in the list box but also the names used in
the user interface (e.g. "job number - [jobid]").
The list box also describes what substitutions are
possible for each placeholder.
0 Output Parameter Set Editor
A report can be created automatically during out-
put. See Report Output Folder, page 1166 for
details.
0 Changes in the preferences
0 "General" tab: "Use Global Settings (are filed in
current workspace)"
Practically all the settings in the "Preferences"
window are considered a "Used Setting".
When this option is enabled, any preferences
from the "Workspace" set in "Paths" (e.g. from
already installed Prinect Signa Stations) are
always used first. The current preferences are
copied to the workspace if there are no prefer-
ences so far.
Any preferences in the local folder are used
first if the option is disabled. If this is not the
case, the "Global Preferences" are copied to the
local path.
The option is run when you click "Save" in the
"Preferences" window.
0 "General" tab: "Show Check Items for Lenticular
Printing"

What Is New? ABC
More details are described in Lenticular Print-

ing Settings, page 984.
0 "General" tab: "Column for 'Background Col-
ors'" was added. Details can be found in the
Marks Editor in "Background Colors":,
page 1132.
0 "General" tab: Handling of the "Suppressed Mes-
sage Boxes" was enhanced noticeably. See Sup-
pressed Message Boxes, page 48 for details.
0 "Names" tab: An output option for suppressing
the product part name was added to "Job File
Name". See Output File Name, page 411 for
details.
0 "Names" tab: An option for dealing with "Ver-
sioning" was added to "JDF Workflow with Pri-
nect Prepress Manager". You will find a descrip-
tion in "Working with the Prinect Prepress
Manager" in the User's Guide.
See JDF Workflow with Prinect Prepress Man-
ager, page 412 for details about the function.
0 "Defaults" tab: "Packaging: Treat Line Type 99 as
Cut" was added to "Several Switches". See Pack-
aging: Treat Line Type 99 as Cut, page 416 for
details.
0 "Defaults" tab: "Snap Lines Relative to Ruler"
was added to "Several Switches". See Snap Lines
Relative to Ruler, page 416 for details.
0 "Reports" tab: "Page and Paper Sizes" was added.
See Page and Paper Sizes, page 423 for details.
0 "Import" tab: "No Gap Computation for" was
added to "JDF Attributes". See No Gap Computa-
tion for:, page 428 for details.

ABC What Is New?
0 "Import" tab: "No Gap Computation for" was

added to "JDF Attributes". See No Gap Computa-
tion for:, page 428 for details.
0 "Import" tab: "Constant Press Sheet Order (rec-
ommended: On)" was added to "JDF Attributes".
See Constant Press Sheet Order (recommended:
On), page 427 for details.
0 "Import" tab: "PDF Handling" was added. See
PDF Handling, page 429 for details.
0 Work Mode: "Montage"
The "Change or Create Station Number..." function
that you could use through the context-sensitive
menu in the graphic window in the "Folding
Sheet/Assembly Block" tab was renamed to
"Change Station Index and Article..." to avoid
ambiguities. See Change or Create Station Num-
ber..., page 824 for details.

0 The new DIPCO 4 color control bars were imple-
mented for the new color control bar workflow.
You can find more details about the new color con-
trol bar workflow in Allow Spot Colors to BCMY,
page 913.
0 The versioning functionality has been optimized.
You will find an example in the User's Guide show-
ing you, among other things, how working with
marks is enhanced as well as a new editor for
"assigning versions to folding sheets". See also
Assign Versions, page 988.

What Is New? ABC
0 The functionality of "Packaging Pro", the packag-

ing module, has been optimized. Further details
can be found in the Online Help of "Packaging
Pro".
0 The new 145+ size for output to large-format plate-
setters was implemented.
0 "General" tab: "Column for 'Ignore in Mark'"
was added. See Column for "Ignore in Mark",
page 44 for details.
0 "General" tab: It is possible to define the num-
ber of recent jobs. See Number of Recent Jobs,
0 "Defaults" tab: You can modify the page-related
bleed with the mouse in the graphic window.
More details can be found in the option Modify
Page-related Bleed in Graphic Window,
page 416.
0 "Resources" tab: It is no longer necessary to
define a barcode font in the preferences. More
details can be found in the User's Guide.
0 New tab, "Reports": A separate "Reports" tab was
added for more clarity. See Reports, page 420
for details.
0 "Import" tab: Two new options were added in
"JDF Attributes". Refer to Automatic Position-
ing during JDF Import, page 427 and Special
Interpretation of Folding Sheet Orientation for
JDF Import, page 427.

ABC What Is New?
0 Job Inspector
0 New option, "Allow Spot Colors to BCMY":
You can enable the above-named option in "Job
Inspector > Colors". This has enhanced the han-
dling of color control bars noticeably. See
Allow Spot Colors to BCMY, page 913 for
details.
0 A job can be frozen when saved. See Prevent
Resource Balancing, page 911 for details.
0 Marks
0 Simplified working with barcode marks Fully
automated working with WST barcode marks.
See Reports, page 420 for details.
0 "Cover Mark Background" was added as an
option in the Color Control Bar Editor. See
"Cover Mark Background":, page 1134 for
details.
0 You can duplicate marks in the graphic win-
dow using the context-sensitive menu. See
Duplicate Mark, page 824 for details.
0 The ink coverage in color marks can be reduced
for proofing. You can save a noticeable amount
of ink this way. See "Ink Coverage in Proof":,
0 The "Ink Pickup Mark" and "Plate Control Mark"
mark types were added in conjunction with
the new color control strip workflow. See
"Mark Type":, page 1131 for details.
0 The "Show Output Status" window in the "Tools"
menu can now also be minimized. As a result, it is
not always in the foreground of

What Is New? ABC
Prinect Signa Station. See Show Output Status,

page 1223 for a description of the window.
0 In the "Montage" mode, you can use the "Change
Station Index and Article..." function to automati-
cally number the 1ups on the back as well. You
will find this function in the graphic window in
"Folding Sheet/Assembly Block". See Change or
Create Station Number..., page 824 for details.

0 New extensive functions for "versioning"
0 The versioning functionality has been
enhanced. For example, you can assign con-
tents to single folding sheets or even to pages.
See Job Details, page 99 or Version Preallo-
cated for Versioned Output (Versioning Only),
page 988 in the Press Sheet Inspector and Ver-
sion Preallocated for Versioned Output (Ver-
sioning Only), page 988 in the Page/1up
Inspector. You will find an example showing
you many of the new functions in the User's
Guide.
0 Enhancements when working with gang run
forms.
You can assign job details to several products parts
in a job. See Job Details in Product Part, page 919
for details.
0 "General" tab: Use Global Settings. See Used Set-
ting, page 42 for details.

ABC What Is New?
0 "General" tab: Column for Darkest Color. See

Column for Darkest Color, page 44 for
details.
0 "Names" tab: Parameters for Automatic File
Names. Preallocation of file names has become
simpler and was moved to the "Names" tab. See
Job File Name, page 411 for details.
0 "Option Chooser" tab: New "Packaging Pro" pur-
chase option. See Product Part Inspector -
"Packaging" tab, page 132 for more details.
0 "Option Chooser" tab: New basic package, "Pri-
nect Signa Station Server". This package is
designed solely for the workflow with the Pre-
press Manager. A layout can be put together
automatically by all the Prepress Manager
Cockpits without having to install Prinect
Signa Station locally.
See the Basic Packages, page 432.
0 "Defaults" tab: New option for simplifying a
sequence. See "AutoArrange" after Plate Loaded
from Product Part Template, page 415 for
details. Also output enhancement, see Output
Parameter Set Automatic, page 416 for
details.
0 "Resources" tab: It is possible for you to define a
second folding sheet label in "Marks Default".
You can select the "1up Proof" template for
packaging printing in "Default for Other
Resources". See 1up Proof Template, page 420
for details.
You can define the "old" "Report Header"
default directly in the list window. See "Save
Table as HTML File...", page 105 for details.

What Is New? ABC
0 "Import" tab: You can show MDS resources in

an easy-to-follow table if you enable the "Show
MDS Resources as Table" option.
0 "Processes" tab: The "Show Spot Colors as True
Colors" option is new in "Preview Attributes".
See Show Spot Colors as True Colors,
0 "Processes" tab: The "Overprint Preview" option
is new in "Preview Attributes". See Overprint
Preview, page 430 for details.
0 New Print Assistant
0 The new "Print Assistant" button is located in
"File > Print Job...". The Assistant displays when
you click this button and guides you through
all relevant output settings. See Print
Assistant ..., page 1218 for details.
The Print Assistant is not available in the work-
flow with the Prepress Manager.
0 New Combi Marks Editor
0 A new separate editor was integrated for combi
marks. The "old" combi mark function in the
following editors no longer exists:
Ink pickup bar
Color Bar
Special color control bar
Marks Import
Marks Import (Line Mark)
See Combi Marks Editor, page 1153 for details
about the new Combi Marks Editor.
0 New function, "Import Job"
0 A compressed ZIP file was written if a job in Pri-
nect Signa Station was exported for data
exchange. The "Import Job" function lets you

ABC What Is New?
open these ZIP files without having to unpack

them first. See Import Job ..., page 126 for
details.
0 New function, "Export Signa Resources..."
0 You write the resources on your computer to a
compressed ZIP file. See Export Signa
Resources..., page 1216 for details.
0 Job Browser
0 The "File" menu has a new function, "Open
with Browser...". An Assistant opens that makes
it easier to look for files. See Open with
Browser ..., page 121 for details.
0 "Browser" window
0 The "Internal Marks" tab was enhanced and
renamed to "Internal Resources". Not only
marks but also other components of the active
job are shown: Plate template, papers (printing
materials), schemes, plate layouts and output
parameter sets. See Internal Resources,
0 You can save the current press sheet as a plate
template in the "Product Parts" tab. Mark the
press sheet and display the context-sensitive
menu. The saved plate template is then avail-
able for other similar jobs. See "Create Plate
Template from Press Sheet", page 69 for
details.
0 New Assistant for easy assignment of PDF files
(pages) to the job. See "Assign Pages...",

What Is New? ABC
0 Graphic window
0 A button for showing or hiding dimensions
was incorporated. See Dimensions on/off:,
0 Enhanced toggling between front and back
sheet. See Front/Back, page 85 for details.
0 You can save settings in the graphic window as
a default. See View Properties and Enable/Dis-
able Layers, page 86 for details.
0 List window
0 You can now save tables also as a PDF. See "Save
Table as PDF File...", page 108 for details.
0 Inspectors
0 You can enter job details for product parts in
"Product Part Inspector > General". See Job
Details in Product Part, page 919 for details.
0 Sort Folding Sheet for Bookbinding
A new automatic function was added in "Prod-
uct Part Inspector > Schemes > Active Inspector
Section > All Folding Sheets". See Sort Folding
Sheet for Bookbinding, page 958 for details.
0 Automatic rotation
See "Product Part Inspector > Schemes > Press
Sheet Layout" Automatic rotation, page 962.
0 Change the mark position
You can select whether the mark will be offset
relative to the reference point or to the last
position. See "Folding Sheet Inspector > Marks
> Position X/Y" "Change" button, page 976 for
details.

ABC What Is New?
0 Marks
0 In the Marks Editor, the layer on which the
mark was positioned is now also shown. You
can set the layer using a list box. More details
can be found in the Marks Editor "General"
Group, page 1131.
0 Other additional fields in the Marks Editor:
"Number of Additional Fields", "Ink Coverage in
Proof", "Color". More details can be found in the
Marks Editor "General" Group, page 1131.
0 In the Marks Editor, the alias name of the mark
is now also shown. More details can be found in
the Marks Editor "General" Group, page 1131.
0 Button for sorting marks in the marks list. See
Marks Tab, page 116 for details.
0 All the marks on the front can now be copied
to the back in the Folding Sheet Inspector.
More details are described in the Folding Sheet
Inspector in Marks, page 967.
0 The ink pickup bar can now also be arranged
vertically. See the Graphic Area, page 1146
for details.

ABC The Heidelberg User Interface
2 The Heidelberg User Interface
Concept of the User Interface

The user interface of Prinect Signa Station was
designed to give you the best possible overview of the
system at all times. A "flat" hierarchy was therefore
selected for the displayed elements, in which wher-
ever possible there are no overlapping windows.
Things can quickly get muddled, especially when sev-
eral dialog boxes, perhaps even overlapping each
other, are open at the same time. The user interface
was therefore designed in such a way that all impor-
tant settings can be made in the main windows of the
application.
Structure of the User Interface

The user interface of the Prinect Signa Station con-
sists of "static" and "dynamic" elements. The static ele-
ments are always visible while the dynamic elements
can change their appearance and contents depending
on the operational process that is currently in
progress.
Prinect Signa Station has four dynamic basic win-
dows that appear when a job is open, showing the
data about it.
You can resize each of the windows to suit your needs,
see Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts, page 217.

The Heidelberg User Interface ABC
The user interface has the following static elements:

0
the menu bar (1)
For details, see Menu Bar, page 23.
0
the toolbar (2)
For details, see Toolbar, page 23.
The user interface has the following dynamic ele-
ments:
0
the Browser window (3)
For details, see Browser Functionality, page 61.
0
the graphic window (4)
For details, see Graphic Window, page 81.
0
the inspectors window (5)
For details, see Inspectors Window, page 91.

0
the list window (6)
For details, see List Window, page 101.
Menu Bar
A menu bar with the "File, "Edit", "Jobs & Resources",
"Inspectors", "Tools", "Services" and "? (Help)" menus is
located at the top of the GUI. The functions listed in
these menus are static and can be selected at any time
you are processing the job.
You will find a description of the menus in the menu

bar in the chapter Menus in Prinect Signa Station,
page 121.
Toolbar
The toolbar is a control element where you can trig-
ger important and frequently used functions with a
click.
In the toolbar, you can open, create and print jobs

and call up various inspectors. You can switch
between the resources view and the job view (also
using shortcut "Alt + 1"). More details can be found in
the "Resources and Machines" chapter, General,
page 71.
You can also select the Default unit, page 45 for Pri-
nect Signa Station.
If you move the mouse pointer to an icon, a tooltip
appears explaining its function.

The Four Basic Windows

The four basic windows of Prinect Signa Station will
now be described.
Browser Window
The Browser window shows you the open and active
job and all of its components in three tabs. A click on
the arrows displays more details in a substructure.
See the Browser Functionality, page 61.
Graphic Window
The graphic window shows you the elements of a job
you selected as a graphic view.

See the Graphic Functionality, page 81.
Inspectors Window
The inspectors window shows you the settings of the
open and selected job. You only see the settings of the
inspector that is currently displayed.
Depending on which inspector you are in, the caption
bar shows the name of the job, product part, work
mode and the name of the current inspector.

See the Where You Can Select Inspectors, page 91.
List Window
The list window shows you the elements of a selected
job as a table.
See the List Functionality, page 101.

Button
Click a button to trigger an action. A window displays
or a function is performed directly.
Folder Button
The folder button opens the file selection dialog, see
the File Selection Dialog, page 211.
Drop-down Menu
You can display different drop-down menus in the
menu bar. See Menus in Prinect Signa Station,

List Box
An arrow on a button indicates that the button con-
tains more than one option and that these options
are mutually exclusive: it is only possible to select one
at a time.
Tabs
The screen contents vary depending on the tab you
click.
Details
The right arrow means that another section with
details (e.g. folder structure) can be opened up. Vice
versa, the down arrow means that this section with
details can be collapsed again.

Option/Check Box
You can select just one of the various options pre-
sented, for example, "To pages/1ups", "To folding
sheets" or "To scheme". This indicates that a setting is
selected.
You can enable or disable a setting with a click on the
button.
Tool Button (On/Off Function)

Each tool button has a function that you can enable
or disable. The button is shown in reverse video when
the function is enabled.
Multitool Button
There is an "arrow" at the bottom right of the button
that lists the available modes or tools when you right-
click it on the PC or use the command key + mouse
button on the Macintosh. Select the mode or tool you
want. It moves to the top of the list where its function
can then be triggered.

Text Boxes
Places where you can enter data yourself are high-
lighted by a dark background.
Numeric Text Boxes

0 Boxes for linear dimensions:
You can decide whether the data displayed will be
with or without a unit of measure in "File > Prefer-
ences > General > Show Units".
0 Boxes for linear dimensions:
The linear dimension is converted to the default
unit of measure if you enter a value in a unit that
doesn't correspond to the default one.
0 Calculations are possible in a numeric text box
(addition, subtraction, multiplication and divi-
sion).
0 Errors: Some boxes have limits. The limit displays
if it is exceeded. The box turns red and a beep
sounds.
0 Accuracy: You can enter numeric values as accu-
rately as you want. The system uses precisely this
accuracy internally. In the user interface, how-

ever, the values that are displayed are only accu-

rate to approx. 1/100 mm.
File Selection Dialog

The file selection dialog appears at various points in
Prinect Signa Station. Two variations of the dialog are
possible.
1. The following dialog displays if you wish to open a
job:
You can then select and open a job. You can use the
buttons to look in folders, create a new folder or
change to a different folder level. Click the arrow on
the right to define your favorite folders.
2. The following dialog displays if you want to load a
template (e.g. a scheme) to a job:

You can then select files in existing structures and

folders. The top folder level displays automatically.
This varies according to where you are in the applica-
tion when you clicked the folder button.
New
The "New" button lets you create your own folder. The
appropriate editor for creating a resource also opens.
Edit
Opens the appropriate editor for editing a resource.

Context-sensitive menu
The functions of a context-sensitive menu vary,
depending on where you are in the application (for
that reason, context).
If you use a mouse with two buttons, click the other
mouse button to display the context-sensitive menu.
(The right button if you are right-handed, and the left
if you are left-handed provided that you reconfigured
your mouse buttons.)
With the Macintosh single-button mouse, you dis-
play the context-sensitive menu by holding down the
Ctrl key at the same time you click with the button.
Below is an example of the context-sensitive menu as
it displays in the graphic window in the "Press Sheet"
tab:

Help!
If you let the pointer hover over a button for a
moment, a tooltip appears explaining what the but-
ton is for. Other useful tooltips appear at many differ-
ent points in the application as well (e.g. text boxes).
You can disable the tooltip display in "File > Prefer-

ences > General".

If you need more information, press F1 on your key-

board to display the Online Help.
The Online Help is context-sensitive. This means that
you first see information that relates immediately to
the context you are presently in.
Hyperlinks
Hyperlinks are blue text that you can use to jump to

somewhere else in the documentation.

Contents/Full Text Search

In the left-hand side of the Help Window, you navi-
gate to a topic from the contents or you can search for
all occurrences of a certain term (full text search by
selecting the magnifying glass).
Forwards/Backwards
Using the arrows in the header and footer of every
page, you can move from one page to the next. In this
way, you can browse through the Online Help from
start to finish just like a book.
The up arrow returns you to the page you started on

in Online Help.
Use the arrows in the toolbar of the Online Help to go

to the previous page and, if you want, back to where
you were.

Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts

You can also call up some functions using keyboard
shortcuts.
You can also call up many functions using mouse and
keyboard shortcuts.
Some shortcuts vary, depending on the computer
platform you use. The following table lists some
shortcuts:
Taste (PC) Taste (Mac)

Befehlstaste Strg */#
Alt-Taste Alt alt /
Eingabetaste E E
Kontextmen alternative ctrl +
Maustaste Maustaste
Umschalttaste
T
Tabulatortaste
You can move sliders with the arrow keys, horizontal

sliders with the left and right arrows, and vertical
sliders with the up and down arrows.
Use the Tab key to jump to the next element.
Hit the spacebar to trigger the function of the
selected element (e.g. button).

General Functions
Keyboard Function
Command key + A Select all files/pages in lists.
Command key + click Add/deselect single files/pages in lists.
Shift key click + click Select blocks of files/pages in lists.
Double click on the The window is maximized at the sides.
caption bar of a window
Double-click the caption bar again to return to the
standard size.
Click on small arrows The window is maximized in length (up arrow) or in
on borders between the width (right arrow).
four basic windows
Click the down/left arrows to return to the standard
size.
Click on window The window is made bigger or smaller manually.
border, move holding
down mouse button
Menu functions
File Menu
Keyboard Function
Command key + O Open Job
Command key + S Save job (selected job)
Command key + N Start Job Assistant
Command key + P Output (displays the "Print Job" window)
Command key + W Close job (selected job)

Command key + Q Exit program
Edit Menu
Keyboard Function
Command key + Z Undo function (not possible with all functions)
Command key + Y Redo function (redoes undone function).
Jobs & Resources Menu
Keyboard Function
Alt + 1 Display the current job
Alt + 0 Go back to the previously selected resources.

Command key + Shift You can switch between the jobs open in the Browser
key + 0, 1, 2, etc. window using digits 1, 2, 3 (job is then active).
Alt + 2 Display general resources and machines
Alt + 3 Display plate templates
Alt + 4 Display schemes
Alt + 5 Display marks
Inspectors Menu
Keyboard Function
Command key + 1 Display the Job Inspector
Command key + 2 Display the Product Part Inspector
Command key + 3 Display the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector

Command key + 4 Display the Press Sheet Inspector

Command key + 5 Display the Page/1up Inspector
Command key + 6 Display the Document Inspector
Tools Menu
Keyboard Function
F3 The graphic window is detached from the user inter-
face so that you can scale it up.
Hit F3 again to integrate the window back into the

user interface.
Browser Window
Keyboard Function
F7 Opens the "Assign Pages..." window.
Only active if a PDF file is loaded in "Contents" in the
Browser window.
Graphic Window
Keyboard / Mouse Function

Double click on the The window in the graphic view is maximized in
caption bar of a window length (applies to all four basic windows).
Double-click the caption bar again to return to the

standard view.

Double click on the Shows or hides the back.

colored caption bar of
the front/back sheet
F11 and F12 key In the "Press Sheet", "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block"
and " Page List" tabs, you can select the next content
with F11 and the previous one with F12.
Command key + space Zoom in
bar + click
Command key + Alt + Zoom out

space bar + click
Command key + + A selected object is shown as large as possible in the

graphic view.
The graphic view is scaled up if nothing is selected.
Returns scaleups to the default (Auto).
Command key + -
Space bar Move tool (hand)

Click on ruler, drag to Set magnetic snap lines
position holding down
mouse button
Alt + click on selected Delete snap line

snap line
Command key + Shift Set a measuring position
key + click
Command key + Shift Create the measurement tool

key + click
hold down mouse but-
ton and draw rectangle

Click on ruler cross, Set zero on the ruler

define position with
mouse pointer and click
Double click on ruler

cross Reset zero to standard origin
Command key + 9 Shows the back.
Command key + 9 again to return to the standard

view.
Command key + 0 Open the "View Properties" dialog
Page Inspector
Keyboard Function
Click in "Offset" box + Set position for alignment of offset
command key + Shift
key + click in the "Fold-
ing Sheet" graphic view
Click in text boxes + left/ Change "Offset" and "Scaling" step-by-step and visibly
right arrow keys (in the graphic window) with the arrow keys
Job Assistant
Keyboard Function
Command key + space Jumps one step forward.
bar
Command key + Shift Jumps one step back.
key + space bar

Editing the Clip Path (Work Mode: Packaging)
Keyboard Function
See Editing the Clip Path, page 136 for details.
Help Menu
Keyboard Function
F1 Online Help

ABC What's What?
3 What's What?
Terms Used in Prinect Signa Station

In this chapter, we will explain essential terms in Pri-
nect Signa Station that are absolutely necessary for
you to fully understand what is being described.
We believe it is very important that you know the
meaning of these terms and what they entail.
Job
A job is saved to your disk as a file with the extension
".sdf" and the name you give it. You can specify the
path to the file location in "Preferences". The job file
contains all the data and settings that were made at
Prinect Signa Station. The job can consist of several
product parts where different working modes (impo-
sition, montage) are defined.
The name of the open job appears in the caption bars
of the four basic windows (Browser window, graphic
window, inspectors window and list window).
Product Part
Is one part of the job. You can save the "Imposition",
"Automatic Imposition"; "Packaging" and "Montage"
working modes as product parts. A product part in
turn can also consist of several parts such as the press
sheets, folding sheets/assembly blocks and the data
pages if they were filed in a page list or 1up list.
You will find all the resources that are part of the job,
e.g. internal marks, in the "Internal Resources" tab. A
mark can be present in several product parts and, for
that reason, marks are job components as well. They
are on the same hierarchy level as the product parts.

What's What? ABC
Master Page
The master page specifies the trimmed size of the
pages on the press sheet. In addition, you can also
define details about the type (left page), extra space
and placement of the assigned pages.
By assigning master pages in a folding sheet (the fold-
ing sheet is part of a press sheet), you define the
dimension of the folding sheet.
Folding Schemes (Schemes, Imposition Schemes)

A folding scheme describes how the sheets will be
folded in finishing. A folding scheme doesn't have any
dimensional data. It only tells you that there are a cer-
tain number of pages on a folding sheet and defines
how they must be folded.
Heidelberg has its own "Heidelberg Fold Type Cata-
log". This has more than 80 folding schemes that
Heidelberg's folders can process.
The fold type catalog is integrated into Prinect Signa
Station. You can also create your own custom scheme
with the "Folding Scheme Editor". More details can be
found in Folding Scheme Editor, page 1110.

ABC What's What?
Folding Sheet
A folding sheet is defined when you give a folding
scheme dimensional data. In Prinect Signa Station,
this is done by assigning master pages or page sizes
and gaps between the pages (head, foot and page
trims).
A folding sheet is the "central unit" in finishing. The
folded sheets can be placed in the stacker of a saddles-
titcher. The saddlestitcher then gathers the sheets
from the stackers and binds them with staples (saddl-
estitching).
A folding sheet contains a folding scheme, assigned
pages and marks (cut, folding and collating).
blue = collating mark
red = folding marks
green = cut marks

What's What? ABC
Plate templates
A plate template describes the parameters that must
be considered during output. They can be press
parameters such as plate size, maximum paper size,
gripper margin, lead edge of print. The plate template
makes sure that imaging is in the exposable area of
the CtP and in the printable area of the press.
The plate template is equivalent to the press sheet
without the folding sheet, i.e. also without the fold-
ing scheme and marks applied subsequently.
Press Sheet (= Plate)

In Prinect Signa Station, the term 'press sheet' is the
same as 'plate' (Press Sheet tab, Press Sheet Inspector).
The press sheet is the same as the plate template with

ABC What's What?
placed folding sheets. You can set the colors for dis-
playing the single elements in the graphic view in the
preferences, "General > Color Setting". Here is an
example:
yellow = folding sheets/assembly blocks
cyan = paper
light purple = plate
blue-and-white line (dark purple area) = max. imaging
area (depends on imagesetter you use)
reddish-brown strip = critical area (gripper margin)

What's What? ABC
Paper (Printing Materials)

Paper (printing materials) is the press sheet that is
printed by the plate. The folding scheme or folding
sheet must fit on the paper.
Subject
Subject is the term for the bounding box around the
printed area on the press sheet.
Assembly Block
An assembly block is very similar to a folding sheet. It
is a type of scheme with the required number of 1ups
and their distribution. All the 1ups of an assembly
block have the same trimmed size (analog to the mas-
ter page in the folding sheet). You can also define the
gaps between the 1ups. Unlike the folding sheet, an
assembly block is not folded but finished in a cutter.
Tiles
Tiles can be folding sheets or assembly blocks. These
can both occur together in one job.
Marks
There are several types of marks such as register, cut,
folding, collating, page and custom marks as well as
color control bars. In Prinect Signa Station, cut, fold-
ing and collating marks can be set automatically, all
other marks on the other hand must be added manu-
ally. The marks on a plate template are used automat-
ically when press sheets are created. You can also
import marks and create your own ones.

ABC What's What?
Bounding Boxes
When assigning PDF data pages, it is important to
know which bounding boxes are in the PDF file and
how Prinect Signa Station evaluates them (see also
the section Placement rule for assigned pages,
page 930).
The following five boxes (sorted by box size) in a PDF
document can be evaluated by Prinect Signa Station:
0
Media box: The media box contains all the objects
of a page. This includes all texts, images and
marks that appear on the page or extend beyond
the page edge.
From a technical point of view, the media box
defines the limits of the physical medium on
which the page is to be printed. Apart from the
complete page, it can comprise space for trim
marks, color control bars and other elements.
The media box is the biggest box.
0
Crop box: The crop box defines the area the page
contents is cropped to for display or output. In
contrast to the other box types this box does not
convey any meaning in relation to the physical
page geometry or the intended use. It merely
defines how the page contents are cropped.
The crop box defines the way the page contents
are positioned on the output medium if no other
information is available (e.g. imposition instruc-
tions via JDF or PJTF job).
The crop box is smaller than the media box.
0
Bleed box
The bleed box represents an extended area around
the trim box. The entire page contents are

What's What? ABC
trimmed by this amount when a bleed area is

defined. A document requiring a bleed also
requires a bleed box. The bleed box is always larger
than the trim box and smaller than the media
box. The bleed area of a printed page can have
print, folding and cut marks, slug lines, etc.
0
Trim box: The trim box specifies the final page size
after printing and cutting.
The trim box is the same as the term "trimmed
size" used in Prinect Signa Station. If a PDF docu-
ment has a trim box, the trim box should be iden-
tical in size to the trimmed size of the page.
The trim box must be smaller than the bleed box
and the media box.
0
Art box
The art box represents a page area (e.g. a graphic
file) that will be positioned when the PDF content
is placed in an application such as a DTP program.
The art box must be smaller than the bleed box.
Note:
2 The very least you should define is the trim box as
imposition is usually based on the trim box. No other
box may be larger than the media box.

ABC Preferences / Getting Started
4 Preferences / Getting Started
Preferences and Getting Started

This chapter will help you to configure Prinect Signa
Station as you need it and to create your first job in
the "Automatic Imposition" mode. To create jobs, you
need resources that you can create later for your own
device setup. For your first job, however, we will use
the default resources. See Creating Custom
Resources, page 73 for details about creating your
own resources.
Preferences
In the Preferences, you can set parameters that sim-
plify working with Prinect Signa Station.
You can save, close or reset your settings at any time
in the dialog:
0
Close
Click this button to discard any changes you made
in all of the tabs and close the window.
0
Reset
Click this button to reset your settings in all of the
tabs back to the last version saved.
0
Save
Click this button to save all the changes you made
in all of the tabs.
General
In this tab, you configure the way Prinect Signa Sta-
tion will display on your screen. In addition, a pre-
view of PDF files can be displayed automatically when
they are being loaded.

Preferences / Getting Started ABC
Used Setting
Use Global Settings (are filed in current workspace)

Preferences can be filed "centrally" just like resources
and used jointly by all users.
When this option is enabled, the structure set in
"Preferences > Paths > Workspace" in Prinect Signa
Station is applicable. A preferences file that is already
in this workspace, for example, from a previously
installed Prinect Signa Station will be used. A restart
of Prinect Signa Station is necessary if different pref-
erences are detected in order for the most recent one
to be used.
If the workspace does not yet have any preferences,
the local settings are copied to the workspace and are
then applicable as global settings that other users can
also access.
The global settings of the logged-in user are copied to
the local path if the option is disabled. A message
describes the preferences that are then used. All
other users are also relocated to their own local area.
View Attributes
List View
It is possible to hide the list window permanently. As
a result, the graphic window is bigger height wise.
If the list window is hidden, you can show it again
only by enabling it in these preferences.
Units in text boxes

The selected unit is shown in boxes where dimensions
are specified.

Paper Name Editable

You can change the name of the paper in "Product
Part Inspector > Plates".
This function should not be enabled in the Prepress
Manager workflow and with the MDS (Master Data
Store).
This is a global setting that is not applied immedi-
ately to an open job. The function is applied only
when you reopen the job.
Units in toolbar
The "Unit" list box is shown by default in the toolbar.
The list box no longer appears when you deselect the
check box.
Column for cutting die color

In the "Packaging" mode, the "Cutting Die" column
displays in the Job Inspector in "Colors > Color Defini-
tions". You can enable the color of the cutting die in
this tab.
A cutting die color indicates the color that is used to
outline a cutting die in a PDF document.
Cutting die colors can be handled separately in the
JDF workflow. For example, output of a plate with a
spot color as the cutting die color can be suppressed
automatically.
See Colors, page 913 for details.
Show check items for multiple web

You can enter different web widths for multiple webs
in "Product Part Inspector > Plates". See Multiple Web
Widths, page 952 for details.

This is a global setting that is not applied immedi-

ately to an open job. The function is applied only
when you reopen the job.
Column for Darkest Color

A "Dark" column displays in the Job Inspector in the
"Colors" tab.
You can define the "darkest color" manually in the Job
Inspector when this option is enabled.
Note: This setting does not affect the JDF workflow
2 with the Prepress Manager because the Prepress Man-
ager sets the darkest color.
Column for "Ignore in Mark"

An "Ignore in Mark" column displays in the Job
Inspector in the "Colors" tab.
You can disable spot colors in marks manually in the
Job Inspector when this option is enabled.
The spot color is ignored for combi marks and also in
the workflow with "Allow Spot Colors to BCMY". Fur-
ther details can be found in Ignore in Mark,
page 915.
Note: This setting is used in the JDF workflow with
2 the Prepress Manager.
Show check items for cover bonding and glue line
You can see the cover bonding and glue line functions
in "Product Part Inspector > Binding" only for web
printing.
More details are described in Gripper Collator / Cover
Bonding / Glue Line, page 939.

Show Check Items for Lenticular Printing

The functions related to lenticular printing display in
the "Assembly Block Inspector > Attributes".
More details are described in Lenticular Printing Set-
tings, page 984.
Tooltips
A tooltip appears or is always hidden.
If you let the pointer hover over an element, e.g. a but-
ton, for a moment, a tooltip appears explaining what
this element is for.
Default unit
The unit selected in the list box is used as the default
unit of measure for your work with the Prinect Signa
Station application.
Existing values are immediately converted to the new
unit if you change the unit of measure in the list box
(e.g. from centimeter to inch).
The following units of measure with their equivalents
in millimeters are available:
Conversion to
Unit of measure millimeters
1 millimeter 1 mm
1 inch 25.4 mm
1 centimeter 10 mm
1 meter 1,000 mm
1 point 0.353 mm
1 Pica 4.21 mm

Conversion to
Unit of measure millimeters
1 Cicero 4.51 mm
1 Didot 0.376 mm
Note: Numbers that have more than three zeros after

2 "0." are shown as exponential numbers.
An example is given below:
The value 0.06 millimeter would be shown as
0.000006 meter if you switched the unit of measure to
meters. However, since the boxes cannot show an infi-
nite number of digits, the value in our example is
shown as an exponential number, 6E-5 meter
Explanation: The first digit '6' describes the real
value, the second digit '5' after the 'E' the number of
zeros after the decimal point.
Display color
This is where you configure the background color for
the Graphic Functionality, page 81.
You can give the various areas different colors to be
able to clearly tell them apart, e.g. the plate and paper
you use. "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block", "Paper",
"Plate", "Critical Section", "Proof Color" and "Dimen-
sioning" can be highlighted by different colors.
The default setting already highlights these areas
accordingly.
1. In the list box in "Display color", select the area whose
color you wish to change.
2. Then click the button beside the list box and change
the colors, using the sliders, to the setting you want
in the "RGB" color space.

3. Confirm the "Color Selection" dialog with "OK".

4. Then save your setting with "Save" in the "Preferences"
dialog.
Number of Recent Jobs

Confines the number of jobs displayed in "File >
Recent Jobs" always to the set value.
In predecessor versions, the list was confined to five
jobs only after Prinect Signa Station was exited. As a
result, the list often became very unclear during a
work shift.
Language
By default, Prinect Signa Station appears in the lan-
guage that is set for the computer's operating system.
However, you can also set the dialog language of Pri-
nect Signa Station, irrespective of the operating sys-
tem. Select one of the languages offered in the "Lan-
guage" list box and save your change.
The language change will take effect the next time
that Prinect Signa Station starts.
Default User
Default user on
The default user set in this box is automatically
logged on when Prinect Signa Station starts.
You will find a description of the implemented user
management in the User's Guide.

Suppressed Message Boxes

To optimize processes, you can suppress many mes-
sage boxes from displaying again by manually
enabling "Do not show this window again". These sup-
pressed message boxes now appear in this list. If nec-
essary, you can reactivate these message boxes again
with the following buttons:
Remove Selected
All selected message boxes display again.
Remove All
All the message boxes in the list display again.
Paths
The preferences defined in "Paths" save you unneces-
sary steps when you are saving and opening files. In
addition, you can define a path to Acrobat Distiller
and Acrobat Reader to start them automatically
whenever they are needed.
Default Folder
The path and folder set in "Workspace" defines where
the resources folders are also filed.
If you change the default "Workspace", the resources
included in the shipment in the "Standard" folder are
copied to this new workspace. Any user-specific
resources remain in the old path structure and can
no longer be seen or selected in Prinect Signa Station.
Set the other folder paths to suit your needs. Click the
folder button and select the folder you want. By
default, data are opened and saved from the set folder
path.

Example:
The folder that you set in the "Paths" tab in "Jobs"
appears by default when you select "File > Open".
Select External Executables

Acrobat Distiller must be installed to be able to open
PostScript files (*.ps). Acrobat Distiller automatically
converts PostScript files to the PDF format.
In Prinect Signa Station, settings are defined for the
Distiller that are used automatically for the conver-
sion to PDF.
You can also define the path to Acrobat Reader for
viewing PDF files.
Note: Using the folder button, define the paths to
2 Acrobat Distiller and Acrobat Reader. Select the
respective ".exe" files.
Names
You can assign names to layers in the "Names" tab that
can then be used as default layer names when you
enter several layers in the Job Inspector (you can
change these names at any time in the Job Inspector).
You can find more details about working with several
layers in the User's Guide or in View Properties and
Enable/Disable Layers, page 86.
In addition, it's also possible to modify and/or define
default names and attributes.
Default Layer Names

In the "Name" column, double-click the row with the
index you want to change and type the new name of
that layer.

Example of a bilingual document with language-inde-

pendent images:
Index Designation
1 Images
2 German
3 English
The procedure for showing layers is described in View

Properties and Enable/Disable Layers, page 86 in the
Graphic Window chapter. You will find a sample job
in the User's Guide.
Surface Names (Press Sheets)
In Sheetfed Press
You can overwrite each of the default terms "Front"
and "Back". The terms are used in the graphic window
and for output.
The names are also written to the JDF in the JDF work-
flow.
In Web Press
You can overwrite each of the default terms "Top" and
"Bottom". The terms are used in the graphic window
and for output.
The names are also written to the JDF in the JDF work-
flow.

Job File Name
Placeholders
In the list box, you can select placeholders that are to
be part of a file name. The placeholders you selected
are used when you click the "Insert placeholder" but-
ton. Placeholders "Job Number" and "Job Name" are set
by default. When you save your job, the placeholders
are replaced as specified in the job, and the name is
set automatically.
The names are evaluated in the JDF workflow with
the Prepress Manager.
More details can be found in Full job name, page 98
in the Job Inspector.
Output File Name

"Create a generic product part name"
An abstract product part name (TP01, TP02, etc.) is cre-
ated in the output file instead of the product part
name if you enable this option.
This option has no effect in the JDF workflow with
Free Text Replacer Names

You can define general, job-specific replacers (fea-
tures) that can then be filled with data in the
"Attributes" tab in the Job Inspector. You can define
up to 15 replacers.
You should define the replacers before you open a job.
When you open a job, the replacers are then defined
in the Job Inspector.
See Attributes, page 916 for more details.

JDF Workflow with Prinect Prepress Manager

This option has been added especially for the interac-
tive variant of the Versioning workflow.
Use Short Variant Name for JDF

When you create press sheet variants with different
versions, their names can be very long, something
which may cause errors during further processing:
For example, FB 001-02-Dt-Dt-En-En-En_Front... (i.e.:
2 x Dt, 3 x En)
Double entries are automatically removed from the
name to shorten it if "Use Short Variant Name for JDF"
is enabled.
In this example: ...FB 001-02-Dt-En_ Front...
Defaults
This tab shows you typical defaults for the functions
usually used. The defaults are only meant to simplify
your work and can be changed at any time later in the
job.
You can also set options for special functions that
simplify or automate a certain procedure.
Bleed Default
Bleed
The default for the bleed is 3 mm.
You can find more details about bleeds in Master
Pages, page 923.

in routing margin
Prerequisite: Perfect binding is chosen as the binding
method.
You can change the bleed in the routing margin. This
enables you to handle the special requirements of dif-
ferent gluing techniques.
Negative values produce a "colorless" area at the rout-
ing edge of a page.
Defaults for folding sheet generation
Minimum and maximum routing margin

The routing margin defines the space that is required
only in perfect binding to get a "smooth" gluing edge.
The default for the "minimum routing margin" is 2
mm and for the "maximum routing margin" 3 mm.
You can find more details about the routing margin
in Use routing margin, page 942.
Maximum head gap / Maximum gap width

The defaults for maximum head gap and maximum
gap width define the largest possible spacing of the
gaps on a folding sheet.
These defaults are applied when you use the "Auto-
matic Gaps" function in the Product Part Inspector in
the "Schemes" tab.
Min. Gripper Fold Values / Max. Gripper Fold Values

By setting minimum and maximum defaults for front
fold and rear fold, you confine the gripper margin to
a reasonable range, matching the saddlestitcher used
in finishing.

The minimum value is set with the "Gripper Collator"

function in the "Binding" tab of the Product Part
Inspector. It is no longer possible to enter a value
higher than the maximum.
Several Switches
Center subject
The subject is centered in all directions relative to the
paper when you select "Sheetwise (front and back)" as
well. The lower edge of the subject with the bleed size
is positioned on the lead edge (blue line) when this
option is not selected.
Scheme filter
Only schemes that fit on the paper and where the
number of pages is less than or equal to the number
of unplaced pages are displayed for selection.
You can disable the filter later when selecting a
scheme, for example, with the Product Part Inspector.
One Folding Sheet per Sheet

The "One Folding Sheet per Sheet" option is the pref-
erence for the same option in the "Product Part
Inspector > Schemes > Active Inspector Section > Press
Sheet Layout". See One Folding Sheet per Sheet,
Constant Press Sheet Order

You can change the folding sheet order for better pag-
ination in the Product Part Inspector in "Schemes >
Active Inspector Section "All Folding Sheets". This
change also changes the press sheet order. Enable this
option if you wish to keep the press sheet order
unchanged.

Restrict "Apply" functions in Page Inspector

In some cases, it may not make sense to apply place-
ment rules and marks to all the pages in the job. You
can use this box to restrict the function to the pages
of the currently active folding sheet/assembly block.
Use Media Box for Positioning

Normally, when you import a PDF content file that
has a trim box (equivalent to the "trimmed size" in Pri-
nect Signa Station), positioning is based on this trim
box.
However, enable this option if you prefer to use the
media box as the basis for positioning your data.
You cannot enable this option in a Prinect workflow.
For more information, see Bounding Boxes, page 37
and the section Placement rule for assigned pages,
page 930.
"AutoArrange" after Plate Loaded from Product Part Tem-

plate
Prerequisite: Both product parts must be gang run
forms. The "Gang run form" option must be set in
"Product Part Inspector > "Plates".
During an import, the option automates the "AutoAr-
range" button in "Product Part Inspector > Schemes >
Active Inspector Section > Press Sheet Layout". For a
description of this function, see Position and orienta-
tion of folding sheet 1up (gang run form only),
page 961.

Output Parameter Set Automatic

Enables the "Parameters" tab in the "Print Assistant"
where you can assign different output parameter sets
to the single press sheets. You can also edit the output
parameter sets.
The setting in "Options" in the output parameter set
is ignored and set to "One job per press sheet".
You will find more details about this option in Print
Assistant ..., page 1218.
Modify Page-related Bleed in Graphic Window

You can modify the page-related bleed with the
mouse.
When you select a page, a black frame displays in
addition to the yellow frame in the "Press Sheet" and
"Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tabs in the graphic
window. The frame reflects the page-related bleed
and, when the option is set, has handles that let you
modify the bleed using the mouse.
Packaging: Treat Line Type 99 as Cut

This option defines line type 99 that is usual in pack-
aging as the cutting line.
Snap Lines Relative to Ruler

You can set snap lines relative to the ruler or relative
to the press sheet/folding sheet. When this option is
set, the snap lines also move when you shift the zero
point; otherwise they remain at the press sheet or
folding sheet.

Switches for Marks Handling
Cut Marks on All Corners

For the "Imposition" and "Automatic Imposition"
working modes.
Cut marks are also set on the "inner" page edges if
there is enough space on a folding sheet.
Fixed Cut Marks in Creeping

The cut marks are not moved in creeping. This affects
the ProofColor layer, gives you a better check of the
proof.
The option must be enabled before you open a job.
You can also set this option in the "Product Part
Inspector > Marks > Other General Marks Defini-
tions".
Subject Clipped Marks Centered on Plate

Color control marks with "AutoClip to subject" are
automatically centered on the plate.
Cut and Folding Marks in Background

You can now place cut and folding marks in the back-
ground to prevent them from covering color control
bars, for example.
Collating Marks in Background

You can now place collating marks in the background
to prevent them from covering color control bars, for
example.

Use Rotated Collating Marks

Collating marks are positioned rotated by 180
degrees.
Proof Color
You can set the line width manually for a proof out-
put.
The default line width is 0.035 mm.
Lines to folding sheet edges

Lines are drawn to the edges of the folding sheet on
the ProofColor layer so that you can judge the proof
better.
Arrow Keys
Defines the distance you move objects in the graphic
window each time you click an arrow key, e.g. when
moving assembly blocks.
Default: 1 mm per step (click on arrow key)
Default Screen Angles for RIPs

Settings in this group do not affect the Heidelberg
workflow (MetaDimension, etc.). The values are used
only when you output to third-party RIPs.
More details can be found in Default Screen Angles,
page 916 in the Job Inspector.
Resources
You can define defaults in the "Resources" tab that Pri-
nect Signa Station will then automatically use.

Assistant
Assistant Template
You can select a product part template for the Job
Assistant. This is then automatically set by default
when the Job Assistant starts and saves you entering a
great number of parameters.
The trashcan icon to the right beside the selection
button removes the default and lets you select a dif-
ferent template.
Marks Default
For your folding sheets, you can select defaults for
"Cut Marks", "Folding Marks", "Collating Marks", "Col-
lating Mark Extension", "Folding Crosses", "Folding
Sheet Cut", "Fold Lay Marks" and "Folding Sheet Label
A and B". These marks are then automatically set if
the relevant boxes were checked in the Product Part
Inspector, for example.
Click the folder button beside the mark type and
select the mark you want.
A change in mark type is immediately applied in the
current job if you first deselect and then check the
relevant box (e.g. "Cut Marks") in the "Marks" tab in
the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector". The
new default mark displays at once in the graphic win-
dow.
Barcode Font
This item is no longer required as of this version. For
a description of working with barcode marks, see the
Chapter "Working with Marks" in the User's Guide.

Default for Other Resources
Reader's Spread Template

You can use the "11x17-TwoUp (ReadersSpread)", "A3-
TwoUp (ReadersSpread)", "A3-TwoUp-Collating-Mix
(ReadersSpread)", "A4-OneUp (ReadersSpread)" and
"Letter-OneUp (ReadersSpread)" product part tem-
plates for converting your data to reader's spread.
These templates cause the defined master pages of
the product part to be converted to reader's spread
when you select "Product part in reader's spread". For
more details, see "Product Part in Reader's Spread /
Product Part for Single 1up Proofs", page 67.
1up Proof Template

You can select product part templates especially for
packaging printing. For more details, see "Product
Part in Reader's Spread / Product Part for Single 1up
Proofs", page 67.
Reports
To document and/or check a job, you can create and
save reports containing all the job data, for example,
in the list window.
An output report can be written if you enable the
"Output Parameter Set Editor > Finishing > Create
Report" option.
After that, you define the standard entries of the
reports.
In addition, you have the option of defining barcode
marks and and then sending them to finishing with
"Save Table as HTML File...". At the saddlestitcher, the
feeders can then be loaded fully automatically.

Procedure:
1. Position the "WST-5-Barcode" default mark on the rel-
evant folding sheets.
2. Go to the list window and select "Select Columns".
3. Add the three WST marks below "Report" with "Add
Text Mark".
4. Confirm the window and send the HTML report to the

"WST Control Client" for finishing with "Save Table as
HTML File...", page 105.
We will now describe the many options you have
when creating your reports.
See "Save Table as HTML File...", page 105 or "Save
Table as PDF File...", page 106 for output of the
reports.

Default for Report Header

This is where you set the defaults that will be in the
files when the reports are output. See "Save Table as
HTML File...", page 105, "Save Table as PDF File...",
page 106 or Create Report, page 1166 for output of
the reports.
Report header
A cover sheet precedes the job data in the reports.
This is defined by the default
"ReportHeader_en.html" file (includes variables such
as job name, customer name, page total,...).
You can define a custom report header with the
Report Templates Editor. See Report Templates Edi-
tor, page 1168 for details. After you defined it, you
can then select it in this tab.
Header
In addition to the report header, you can also add a
header to the beginning of the report by selecting a
mark.
Company logo
Besides the report header and header, you can also
assign a graphic file to the reports by selecting a
".png" graphic file with the company logo.
Default for Surfaces

This is where you define the defaults for labeling and/
or displaying preview images in the reports. In addi-
tion, you can also include certain view properties
from the graphic window in the reports.

Details about setting view properties in the graphic

window can be found in View Properties and Enable/
Disable Layers, page 86.
Surface header, surface footer, preview size

You can label press sheets in the print report by
selecting and positioning marks. You can also define
the size of the press sheet preview images.
Dimensioning
All units of measure set in the graphic window are
written to the report.
Outline mode display

All icons set in the graphic window are written to the
report.
Use graphic view setting

All view properties currently set in the graphic win-
dow are written to the report. The setting defined in
the "View" tab in the graphic window is applicable.
See page 87 for details.
Default for Footer

You can add right, left and centered footers to the
reports by selecting marks.
Page and Paper Sizes

The "Page and Paper Sizes" you want are added to the
reports when you select them.

Attributes for Report Handling
Reports with Preview

The press sheets in a job are written as an overview to
the report.
The report contains HTML file information about the
job and image files (*.png) with the press sheets avail-
able in the job.
Always Show Last Configuration in Save Dialog

The last version saved of the job with its preferences is
shown in the report.
When this option is enabled, the currently set prefer-
ences are not shown.
Automatic Reports for JDF Output

Reports are written automatically when JDFs are out-
put. A "report" folder is created in the output path,
and the HTML report of the job is filed in this folder.
In older versions, it was not possible to output reports
for a JDF output from the list window.
Import
Defaults for JDFConnector

The JDF Connector checks the specification of the JDF
files that will be imported and adapts some of the
parameters for Prinect Signa Station. An error log file
and the JDF file are moved to an error folder if the JDF
file specification is incorrect for Prinect Signa Sta-
tion. The JDF Connector does not correct any errors in
the JDF file.

The JDF Connector is a separate program that is also

installed during installation. It runs automatically
from a defined hot folder if "AutoStart JDF Connector"
is checked and checks any incoming JDF files.
It is also possible to start two JDFConnectors and set
them up differently if you are working in parallel
with two different versions of Prinect Signa Station.
The input folder is defined by default as the hot
folder:
"C:...\All Users\Application Data\Heidel-
berg\PrinectSignaStation_4_5\JDFConnectorIn"
All JDF files saved or copied to the input folder are

checked automatically by the JDF Connector and are
moved to the error folder or output folder, depending
on the result.
Default output folder:
"C: ...\All Users\Application Data\Heidel-
berg\PrinectSignaStation_4_5\JDFConnectorOut"
You can then load the JDF file from the output folder
to Prinect Signa Station with "File > Open" or "File >
Import > JDF...".
The following folder hierarchy is set by default:

Resources Default for JDFs with Job Prep Data

The output parameter set defined in this box is used
automatically if the "Complete Layout" function was
used in the Prepress Manager. When this function is
set, the layout is generated automatically after the
JDFs are imported from the Prepress Manager and is
sent back to the Prepress Manager without any man-
ual intervention.
Default Groups for Imports (JDF / Signa 9 Template)
Plate templates
This is where you define the folder where Prinect
Signa Station looks for a suitable plate template dur-
ing a JDF or Signa 9 Template import. The search cri-
terion is the sheet size named in the JDF.
Click the folder button on the right and select the
folder you want. The "Standard" folder is set by
default.
Scheme
This is where you define the folder where Prinect
Signa Station looks for a suitable scheme during a JDF
or Signa 9 Template import.
Click the folder button on the right and select the
folder you want. The "Standard" folder is set by
default.
JDF Attributes
Automatic Gaps with JDF Import

If this option is checked, Prinect Signa Station uses
product-specific algorithms to check the data from
the JDF and correct any errors.

The data from the JDF are used as they are if this
option is disabled when you import JDFs with inter-
nal "stripping params" (from job preparation).
Default: The option is enabled to correct any errors in
the JDF.
Automatic Positioning during JDF Import

The positions of the folding sheets are calculated
automatically by Prinect Signa Station when JDF files
with gang run forms are imported.
Special Interpretation of Folding Sheet Orientation for JDF

Import
It can be wise to enable this option when importing
JDF files from third-party MIS systems. The folding
sheets are then oriented automatically by Prinect
Signa Station.
Constant Press Sheet Order (recommended: On)

This option is identical to that in "Preferences >
Defaults", in this case it automatically includes the
procedure for an import from an MIS system. For an
explanation of this function, see Constant Press Sheet
Order, page 414.
Show warning if plausibility check fails during output after

JDF import
During the output of imported MIS JDF files, mes-
sages are issued, indicating the changes to the
imported JDF after processing by Prinect Signa Sta-
tion (e.g. change of press, modified sheet name).

No Gap Computation for:

You can define machines, separated by commas,
where there will be no automatic gap computation.
MDS (Master Data Store)
Use MDS
Connection to an MDS is possible if you are working
with the Prepress Manager and/or MetaDimension
and an MDS is installed. Type the name of the server
on which the MDS is installed.
Working with an MDS lets you access central
resources in the network from your workstations.
You can export only local resources of "Papers (Print-
ing Materials)" of a workstation to the MDS. See "To
MDS...", page 78 for details.
The "Papers (Printing Materials)", "Customer Data",
"User Data", "Filmsetters", "Platesetters" and "Sheetfed/
Web Presses" resources are available through the MDS
but can only be viewed in the respective editor. It is
not possible to edit the MDS resources with Prinect
Signa Station.
Local resources for the "Platesetters", "Filmsetters",
Sheetfed Presses", "Web Presses" and "User Data"
resources are available in addition to the MDS
resources.
You can find resources from the MDS in "Resources &
Machines" in the "MDS" tab where they can be dis-
played as tables. See the next item for details.

Show MDS Resources as Table

The MDS resources are shown in an easy-to-follow
table. More details can be found in the "Resources and
Machines" chapter, MDS, page 722.
PDF Handling
Encoding
PDFs can have different types of encoding. You can set
a default encoding type in a list box for correct inter-
pretation.
Processes
Preview Attributes
Automatic Preview
Previews are automatically calculated when pages are
assigned in a job. These are shown in the graphic win-
dow.
Hires Preview
Imported pages are shown with a resolution of 72 dpi
in the preview in the graphic window. You can
increase the preview resolution to 144 dpi if you
select "Hires Preview".
Note: Remember that it takes some time to compute
2 previews. If necessary, you can always generate pre-
views later in the Browser or graphic window.
Show Spot Colors as True Colors

Prerequisite: MDS (Master Data Store) is enabled.

Spot colors are shown as true colors if color tables for

the spot colors are defined in the MDS.
Overprint Preview
The "Overprint Settings" defined in the PDF are also
calculated and shown.
PDF Preview Attributes
One Page per Color in Separated PDF

When this option is selected, each color separation
(CMYK and any spot colors) becomes a single docu-
ment page. Color separations are not combined to
form logical pages.
Use Thumbnails for Preview

Prinect Signa Station doesn't calculate the preview
itself but uses the thumbnails of the PDF file that you
will import.
The advantage of this is a fast view but the quality of
the preview may not be the best.
Attributes for HTML Reports

This option was moved to the "Reports" tab. See
Reports, page 420 for details.
Output Attributes
AutoClose output dialog

The "Print Job ..." dialog closes automatically after a
job is output and is no longer in the background.

Option Chooser
The window below displays when you first start Pri-
nect Signa Station.
To add to or change your licenses and options at a
later period, you can make your changes in the
"Option Chooser" tab. The changes are enabled when
the system restarts.

License Server
This option is set by default and lets you install a full
version of Prinect Signa Station. You must have a valid
license for this.
Demo Mode
The entire software functionality is available to you
in the demo mode. You can put the software through
all its paces and only then decide if you want to
acquire a license.
It is not possible to output a job. When you save demo
jobs, they will be marked so that you cannot output
any of the jobs you created.
Attention: You can open jobs from the full version of
1 Prinect Signa Station and change them but you can-

not output them again once they are saved in the
demo mode. You should not open your production
jobs with the demo version.
License Server (name or IP number)

A Heidelberg license server must be installed on your
computer or in the network to be able to run Prinect
Signa Station. Type the name or IP address of this
license server into the box.
Refresh Connection
Shows connection status to the License Server. You
can refresh the display if necessary.
Basic Packages
Select the basic package you have a license for. The fol-
lowing packages are available:

0
Prinect Signa Station 52: Printing plate width is
restricted to 67.5 cm. All output formats are avail-
able to you (PDF, JDF, PostScript, Adobe Portable
Job Ticket Format (JT)).
0
Prinect Signa Station 75: Printing plate width is
restricted to 83.5 cm. All output formats are avail-
able to you (PDF, JDF, PostScript, Adobe Portable
Job Ticket Format (JT)).
0
Prinect Signa Station 105: Printing plate width
is restricted to 116.5 cm. All output formats are
available to you (PDF, JDF, PostScript, Adobe Porta-
ble Job Ticket Format (JT)).
0
Prinect Signa Station 145+": Printing plate width
is restricted to 405 cm. All output formats are
available to you (PDF, JDF, PostScript, Adobe Porta-
ble Job Ticket Format (JT)).
0
Prinect Signa Station JDF/JT: Printing plate
width is restricted to 405 cm. Only the JDF and JT
(Adobe Portable Job Ticket Format) output formats
are available to you.
0
"Prinect Signa Station Server": Printing plate
width is restricted to 405 cm. Only the JDF and JT
(Adobe Portable Job Ticket Format) output formats
are available to you.
You may use this variant only in a workflow with
A layout can be put together automatically by all
the Prepress Manager Cockpits without having to
install Prinect Signa Station locally.
Options
Select the option matching your license. Multiple
selection is possible. The following options are given:

0
"Presetting": With this option released, data for
further processing (CIP4-JDF) are automatically
generated. In addition to the automatically gener-
ated CIP4-JDF data you can manually generate PPF
files (see also User's Guide, chapter "Generation of
CIP3-PPF/CIP4-JDF Data").
0
"Sheet Optimizer": When this option is enabled,
you can use all the functions for sheet optimiza-
tion in the "Montage" mode (see the section Sheet
Optimization, page 141).
0
"Packaging": When this option is enabled, you can
work in the "Packaging" mode (see the
section Packaging, page 131).
0
"Packaging Pro": Has other editing and animation
functions in addition to "Packaging" (see the
section Packaging, page 131).
Login Window
A login dialog always appears for logging in to Prinect
Signa Station.
When you log in the first time, use the default user
"Signa" and the password "signa".
Proceed as follows to change the user:

1. You assign user permissions and change users in "Jobs

& Resources > Resources & Machines > User Data".
2. Mark the "Signa" user in "PrePress Administrators"
and display the context-sensitive menu.
3. Click "Edit User Data..." to change the default user.
4. Type in the user name you want and repeat your pass-
word twice and then click "Save".
You will then see the changed user in the list of
defined "PrePress Administrators". The user has the
permissions of the "PrePressAdministrators" group.
More details can be found in the User's Guide in User
Management.
To avoid the login dialog appearing every time Pri-
nect Signa Station launches, you can set an automatic
user login:
0
In "File > Preferences > General > Default User",
enable the check box and select a user. After this,
the login dialog no longer appears.

Your First Job

When you are happy with the preferences you
defined, you can start on your job.
We can skip creating resources for the moment as
ready resources are shipped with Prinect Signa Sta-
tion. Read up on how to create your own resources in
the User's Guide or in Creating Custom Resources,
page 73.
Job Specifications
0
You will create your first job, a Heidelberg man-
ual, in the "Automatic Imposition" mode.
0
The book will be approx. 70 pages long, will have
perfect binding and be printed in A5 format. The
book describes the "SuperColor" application.
0
A Prosetter imagesetter will be used for output
and an SM102 as the press.
0
You will create the job with the help of the Job
Assistant integrated in Prinect Signa Station.
Procedure
1. Start the Job Assistant with "File > New" or use the
shortcut "command key + N".
2. The Job Assistant window displays:
The Job Assistant defines the logical order in which

you can set all the data you need for your job.

3. You define general data for your job in the "Job Data"
window. Enter the following data for your first job:
(4.) Job Number = 0001
(5.) Job Name = Heidelberg manual
(6.) Click the "Folder" button in the "Customer Name" row.
(7.) Select "Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG" from the
"Standard" folder and confirm with "OK". Select any
customer you want if you are working with an
enabled MDS (Master Data Store).
(8.) The customer name and the customer number are
used automatically.
(9.) In "Job Details", enter the "Target Date" and the "Vol-
ume" (quantity) you want for the job. Other inputs in
the "Job Data" window are not necessary.
10. Go to the next window "Product Part Definition" by
clicking the "right arrow" button in the lower part of
the window.
11. In the "Product Part Definition" window, you give the

product part a name and select the working mode
you want:
(12.) Enter "Prinect Color Editor" as the product part name
in "Main Features > Name".
(13.) Check "Enabled" in "Job Details in Product Part" and
enter your data.
(14.) Select "Automatic Imposition" as your work mode.
Other inputs in the "Product Part Definition" window
are not necessary.

15. Go to the next window "Master Pages" by clicking the

"right arrow" button in the lower part of the window.
16. You define the trimmed size in the "Master Pages"
window:
(17.) Click the folder button after "Width" and "Height".
(18.) Select the "A5" page format from the "Standard"
folder. The A5 values are automatically applied.
(19.) As we don't need any bleed for our documentation,
set "Page-related bleed" to "0". Other inputs in the
"Master Pages" window are not necessary.
20. Go to the next window "Binding Methods" by clicking
the "right arrow" button in the lower part of the win-
dow.
21. Select "Perfect Binding in "Binding Methods". Other
inputs in the "Binding Methods" window are not nec-
essary.
22. Go to the next window "Marks" by clicking the "right
arrow" button in the lower part of the window.
(23.) Select the check boxes for "Cut Marks", "Folding
Marks" and "Collating Marks" in "Automatically
Placed Print Control Marks".
(24.) You can leave all other settings in the window as they
are.
25. Go to the next window "Printing Plates" by clicking
dow.
26. You select the plate template and paper definition
you want in the "Printing Plates" window:
(27.) Click the folder button after "List of Selected Plate
Templates".

(28.) For example, select the "SM102" plate template from

the "Standard" folder. The values of the plate template
are displayed in the window and automatically
applied after you confirm with "OK".
(29.) Select "Sheetwise (front and back)" in the "Placement
rule for perfecting" list box.
(30.) Click the folder button after "Paper Definition for Pro-
duction".
(31.) Select the "Profisilk_90_100x70" paper from the
"Standard" folder. The values of the paper are dis-
played in the window and automatically applied after
you confirm with "OK".
32. Go to the next window "Folding Schemes" by clicking
dow.
33. In the "Folding Schemes" window, you define the fold-
ing scheme and set the head, foot and back margins
(if necessary, automatic setting):
(34.) Click the folder button after "Scheme Name".
Note: When you select a scheme, only those schemes
2 that can be arranged best on the sheet using the set-
tings you defined so far (selected trimmed size, plate
template and paper size) will be displayed.
You can disable this filter function, if necessary, in
the lower part of the window.
(35.) Select the "F32-05_li_4x4" scheme from the "Stan-
dard" folder. The scheme displays in the graphic win-
dow on the right and is automatically applied after
you confirm with "OK".
(36.) Click "Automatic Gaps" to apply the gaps from the
preferences. The scheme changes accordingly in the
graphic window and displays as follows:

37. Now quit the Job Assistant by clicking the "end" right
arrow button in the lower part of the window. This
concludes your job setup in the Job Assistant.
38. You have now created your job, but it is not yet saved.
Select "File > Save as...". The job name is suggested as
entered and you can save it with "Save". Import of the
PDF files can now start.
39. Go to the "Contents" tab in the Browser window.
Right-click (PC, Mac: ctrl key and click) "PDF Docu-
ments" to display the context-sensitive menu and
select "Documents...".
40. The window that opens displays automatically in the
"Documents" folder. Select "Prinect Color Editor.pdf".
The PDF file displays in the Browser window.

41. Right-click (PC, Mac: ctrl key and click) "Prinect Color
Editor" to display the context-sensitive menu and
select "Assign Pages". The pages are positioned auto-
matically in the scheme in the graphic window.
42. When all the pages are imported, save your job again.
Select "File > Save".
43. Now check whether all the pages were positioned cor-
rectly and all the press sheets required created. Dou-
ble-click the "yellow" caption bar in the "Press Sheet"
tab in the graphic window. You now see front and
back and they should be something like this:

44. Change to the "Press Sheet List" tab. The press sheet
list shows you all the press sheets that were created
and that you need:

45. Two press sheets with front and back were created in
our job.
46. After a check, you can now print your job. Go to "File
> Print Job".
47. Click the folder button after "Output Parameter Set"
and select "Prosetter (PDF)" from the "Standard"
folder.The press sheets you wish to print are already
selected.

48. Click the "Edit" button after "Output Parameter Set",

then click the folder button after "Output folder for
PDF, JDF, JT" in the "General" tab and select the sug-
gested folder "Output" if it is not yet entered.
49. Click "Save" and "Close" the window.
50. Now click the "Output" button.
51. You will be notified if your output was successful.
Close the window by clicking "OK".
52. At the PC, the file is saved to the following folder:
"C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Heidelberg\PrinectSignaStation_4\Output".
53. At the Macintosh, the file is saved to the following
folder: "C:\Startup Disk\Users\All Users\Heidel-
berg\PrinectSignaStation_4\Output".
54. The PDF file with all its parameters is printed to the
folder listed above.

ABC Job Assistant
5 Job Assistant
Basics about Job Assistant

The Job Assistant guides you step-by-step through
your data input in the various inspectors and makes
it easy for you to create and change jobs and product
parts.
The Job Assistant has the same data input structure as
the inspectors. It's easy for you because you don't have
to know which parameters must be entered or
changed in which inspector and the order in which
you must do this. The Job Assistant presents you with
all the relevant parameters in their turn.
You always create a new job with the Job Assistant.
To change a job, you don't need the Job Assistant. You
can make changes directly in the inspectors window
if you want to change just one or two parameters in
the job or product part or if you are already very
familiar with the inspectors. For more details, see
Inspectors Window, page 91.
The "From Template" folder buttons allow you to use
existing resources at any time, for example, jobs, cus-
tomer data, product parts, page sizes, plate templates
and folding schemes. Refer also to Resources and
Machines, page 71.
Starting the Job Assistant

You can open the Job Assistant with "File > New" or by
displaying the context-sensitive menu in the "Product
Parts" tab in the Browser window and selecting "New"
there.
You can also you mark your job or product part in the
"Product Parts" tab in the Browser window, then dis-
play the context-sensitive menu to edit an existing job
or product part.

Job Assistant ABC
The contents of the Job Inspector vary, depending on

the context you display the Job Assistant from (e.g.
editing a product part). Only the steps that are
required are shown. To edit a product part, you no
longer need the job data (e.g. customer data) and, for
that reason, they are not displayed there.
New Job
To open the Job Assistant to create a new job:
0
Start the Job Assistant with "File > New" or display
the context-sensitive menu in the "Product Parts"
tab in the Browser window and select "New" there.
The following window displays:
You enter job-specific data in "Job Data", see Adminis-

trative Data, page 97 for details.
In "Product Part Definition", you decide on the mode
you would like to work with. The data input structure
of the Job Assistant varies depending on the mode
you selected. Only boxes relating to packaging are
shown if you selected "Packaging" as your working
mode. Any boxes that are not relevant are automati-
cally hidden by the Job Assistant.
You will find explanations about the other stages and
their order in Order of the Steps, page 54.
Edit Product Part

To open the Job Assistant to edit a product part in the
"Imposition" working mode:

ABC Job Assistant
0
Mark your product part in the "Product Parts" tab
in the Browser window, then display the context-
sensitive menu and select "Edit Product Part". The
following window displays:
To open the Job Assistant to edit a product part in the

"Montage" working mode:
0 Mark your product part in the "Product Parts" tab
in the Browser window, then display the context-
sensitive menu and select "Edit Product Part". The
following window displays:
Working with the Job Assistant

In the open Job Assistant, enter your data and go to
the next step by clicking the "right" arrow button.
The progress bar in Job Assistant shows you at what
stage you are (orange dot) and what is already fin-
ished (green dot).
You can quit the Job Assistant at any time and not cre-
ate a job by clicking the "Cancel" button.
Click the "back" button if you wish to check and, if

necessary, correct the data you entered.

Job Assistant ABC
When you are at the last step, you can close the Job
Assistant with the following slightly highlighted but-
ton:
The job or product part appears in the Browser win-

dow in the "Product Parts, page 62" tab. Your job or
edited product part is not yet saved on your hard disk
at this point. Now save it with "File > Save".
Order of the Steps

1. Job Data
Administrative Data, page 97
2. Product Part Definition
Definition, page 918
3. Master Pages (not in the "Montage" and "Packaging"
working modes)
Master Pages, page 923
4. Binding Methods (not in the "Montage" and "Packag-
ing" working modes)
Binding, page 932
5. Marks (not in the "Montage" and "Packaging" working
modes)
Marks, page 943
6. Printing Plates
Plates, page 947
7. Folding Schemes (not in the "Montage" and "Packag-
ing" working modes)
Schemes, page 953

ABC Job Assistant
8. Assembly Blocks (not in the "Imposition / Automatic

Imposition" and "Packaging" working modes)
Assembly Block Inspector, page 980
9. Cutting Die (CFF2) (only in the "Packaging" working
mode)
Packaging, page 131

ABC Browser Window
6 Browser Window
Browser Functionality
When you open a job with "File > Open", all informa-
tion about this active job displays in the Browser win-
dow.
A new job created with the Job Assistant also appears
in the Browser window together with all its compo-
nents.
You can open several jobs with "File > Open". However,
only one job at a time can be "active". The data of this
job are shown in the inspectors, list and graphic win-
dows. When you open a job, this one is automatically
the "active" one.Only the "active" job shown in the
Browser window can be edited.
To go to another open job, click the name of the job
you want in the "Jobs & Resources" menu. A tick
appears before the selected job that displays in the
Browser window for editing (it is now the active job).
Note: If you want several jobs open at the same time,
2 remember that each job needs memory. Always open
only a manageable number of jobs so as not to over-
tax your computer capacity unnecessarily.
The window has three tabs. These tabs show you data
in an easy-to-follow tree structure. You can also start
many different actions with the implemented Con-
text-sensitive menu, page 213.
When you create a job with the Job Assistant, it first
appears in the Browser window but is not yet not
saved. Save a job as follows:
0
Select "File > Save". See also Save, page 1216.
The "Product Parts", "Contents" and "Internal
Resources" tabs show you all the components in the
job.

Browser Window ABC
You can drag-and-drop PDF files, folding sheets/assem-

bly blocks to the graphic window and place them on
plates, pages or even on the paper of the job that is
currently open. You can find more details about drag-
and-drop in What's Behind Drag-and-Drop, page 151
or in the User's Guide.
Product Parts
The open (active) job is shown in a clear tree structure
in the "Product Parts" tab. Several jobs can be open at
the same time but only the active job can be edited.
This also applies to a job that has several product
parts. You must click the product part that you wish
to edit with the mouse so that it becomes active.
You can also start many actions simply with the con-
text-sensitive menu.
The open job displays all its product parts, folding
sheets, page lists and press sheets. Each of these items
has its own tree structure that can be expanded by
clicking the arrow before the structure. You can then
see other details.
Functionality
You trigger the functions in the "Product Parts" tab
with the Context-sensitive menu, page 213.
Exception: Working with drag-and-drop, see What's
Behind Drag-and-Drop, page 151.
0
To open an existing job, start the Job Assistant to
create a new job or import documents to the job:
Display the context-sensitive menu in the "Product
Parts" tab and select "Open", "New", "Documents"
or "Recent Jobs".

ABC Browser Window
Note: If you want several jobs open at the same

2 time, remember that each job needs memory.
Always open only a manageable number of jobs so
as not to overtax your computer capacity unneces-
sarily.
0
To display the open (active) job with all its product
parts:
0
To change the active job. If several jobs are open,
activate a different job by clicking the job name in
the "Jobs & Resources" menu or using the shortcut
"command key + Shift + number". The job then dis-
plays in all the windows and can be edited.

Browser Window ABC
0
A double click on folding sheets, press sheets or
imported pages in the page list opens the relevant
view in the graphic window and displays the
respective inspector in the inspectors window so
that you can edit them.
0
The following functions are found in the context-
sensitive menu when a job name is selected:
0
"Job Inspector"
Displays the Job Inspector. More details can be
found in Job Inspector, page 97.
0
"Edit Job..."
Displays the Job Assistant so that you can edit
the job data. You can only select this function if
neither pages were assigned yet nor several
product parts defined. More details can be
found in Basics about Job Assistant, page 51.
0
"New Product Part..."
Displays the Job Assistant so that you can cre-
ate another product part. More details can be
found in Basics about Job Assistant, page 51
(without customer data).
Note:
When you select "New Product Part", the calcu-
lation basis for selecting a product part tem-
plate with the "Readers Spread" parameter is
missing. To generate a reader's spread, please
select solely the "Product Part in Reader's
Spread / Product Part for Single 1up Proofs",
page 67 function.
0
"Save"
The job you selected is saved. More details can
be found in Save, page 1216.
0
"Save as..."
The job is saved, allowing you to change the job

ABC Browser Window
name if you want. More details can be found in

Save as ..., page 1216.
0
"Close Job"
Closes the open job. More details can be found
in Close, page 1217.
0
"Save job as "Resources/Job Templates"..."
The job is saved as a template. All the data in
the job are saved and filed to "Resources > Job
Templates".
Exceptions: Imported pages, job number, job
name, customer name and customer number.
You can display the saved templates with "Job
Assistant > Job from Template" or with the Job
Inspector > "Administrative Data > Job from
Template" and then select the template you
want.
Note: You must set up your own group folder
2 before you save a template or resource. Enter
the folder name you want after "Group" or
select one from the list box. The template or
resource is saved in the folder. See To create a
group folder, page 75 for details.
0
"Print Job..."
Opens the window for printing plates. Refer
also to Print Job ..., page 1217.
0
sensitive menu when a product part is selected
(top level in tree structure):
0
"Product Part Inspector"
Displays the Product Part Inspector. More
details can be found in Product Part Inspector,
page 917.

Browser Window ABC
0
"Edit Product Part..."
Displays the Job Assistant. More details can be
found in Basics about Job Assistant, page 51
(without customer data).
0
"Save product part as "Resources/Product Parts
Templates"..."
The product part is saved as a template. You can
display the saved templates with the Job Assis-
tant in "Product Part Definition > From Tem-
plate" or with the Product Part Inspector in
"Main Features > From Template" and then
select the one you want.
Note: You must set up your own group folder
2 before you create a template or resource. See
To create a group folder, page 75 for details.
0
"Save Product Part as Default for the Assis-
tant...".
The product part is saved as the default tem-
plate for the Job Assistant. The Job Assistant
launches with the setup of the saved product
part.
You will find the selected product part (marked
by a green star) in "Jobs & Resources >
Resources & Machines > Resources > Product
Parts Templates". At this point, you can now
reset this default to the standard template by
displaying the context-sensitive menu and
selecting "Reset as Default for the Assistant" or
you can set a different product part by select-
ing "Set as Default for the Assistant".
You then display the saved template by starting
the Job Assistant with "File > New...".

ABC Browser Window
0
"Product Part in Reader's Spread / Product Part
for Single 1up Proofs"
In an "imposition" job, a reader's spread can be
generated from a ready, job-specific product
part. This reader's spread then appears in the
job structure as another product part with the
extension "readersspread".
The reader's spread gives a true display of the
product (leaflet, etc) on the screen (in the
graphic window) that can be output to a
printer (layout print).
It has no other functions.
In a packaging job, a 1up is generated from the

product part. The 1up appears as another prod-
uct part in the job structure. The 1up displays
in the graphic window and can be output to a
printer (layout print).
0
"Duplicate Product Part"
The product part you selected is duplicated
with all its components and filed in the job as
another product part of the same name with
"copy" added to it.
0
"Delete Product Part"
The product part you selected is deleted from
the job.
0
"Print All Press Sheets of the Product Part..."
The "Print Job ..., page 1217" dialog displays.
0
"3D Collating Mark Visualization"
The collating marks of the product part you
selected are shown in a three-dimensional
view. See 3D Collating Mark Visualization,

Browser Window ABC
0
"3D Reader's Spread Visualization"
The product part you selected is shown in a
three-dimensional view. The reader's spread
shows you a true display of the product (leaflet,
etc), allowing you to visually check the product
part in a simple way. See 3D Reader's Spread
Visualization with Data Pages, page 1230 for
details.
0
sensitive menu when the press sheet is selected
(second level in tree structure):
0
"Press Sheet Inspector"
Displays the Press Sheet Inspector, page 985
in the inspectors window.
0
"Print Press Sheet..."
Prints the currently selected press sheet. The
Print Job ..., page 1217 window displays.
0
Prints the currently selected product part with
all the press sheets. The Print Job ...,
page 1217 window displays.
0
sensitive menu when a single press sheet is
selected (third level in tree structure):
0
Displays the Press Sheet Inspector, page 985
in the inspectors window.
0
Prints the currently selected press sheet. The
0
Prints the currently selected product part with

ABC Browser Window
all the press sheets. The Print Job ...,

page 1217 window displays.
0
"Create Plate Template from Press Sheet"
The current press sheet is saved without the
folding sheet, folding scheme and content
pages as a plate template in the "Plate Tem-
plates" resource. This function makes it easy for
you to create your own plate templates.
0
sensitive menu when a single page in the page list
or a single 1up in the 1up list is selected (fourth
level in tree structure):
0
"Preview"
Generates previews of the pages. You can view
the preview in the graphic window. You can set
general view properties. See Default User,
0
"Delete Page Assignment"
Deletes assignment of the selected page(s) or
1up(s) in the job. The pages or 1ups in the job
no longer have any assigned content.
0
"Paste Pages from Clipboard"
If you copied a page or 1up from a PDF file to
the clipboard in the "Contents" tab in the
Browser window, you can paste it in anywhere
you want.
You can also use this function in the graphic
window in the context-sensitive menu in "Page
List" >.
This function is really suitable for positioning

certain pages/1ups several times. In the "Page
List" tab in the graphic window, select several
pages/1ups (command key and click) and paste

Browser Window ABC
the content of the clipboard on the selected

pages/1ups using the context-sensitive menu.
0
"Assign Blank Page" (add a blank page)
Can only be selected in the "Imposition" and
"Automatic Imposition" working modes.
A blank page is pasted before the selected page.
The page size defined in the scheme is used
automatically. The subsequent pages with their
contents shift back one page.
This method is used when, for example, blank
pages that were not in the PDF document must
be pasted to certain positions.
You can also use this function in the graphic
window in the context-sensitive menu in "Page
List" >.
0
"Show Page in Press Sheet"
The press sheet on which the page you are look-
ing for is positioned is highlighted in the
Browser window. The page displays in the
graphic window when you double-click the
press sheet.
Contents
The "Contents" tab lets you import PDF and PS files to
the job currently open. You can import the data to
one or more layers. See chapter 10 in the User's Guide
for details.
Functionality
You trigger the functions in the "Contents" tab with
the Context-sensitive menu, page 213.

ABC Browser Window
0
You can import PDF and PS files to the job cur-
rently open with the "Contents" tab. Display the
context-sensitive menu in this tab, click "Docu-
ments" and select a PDF or PS file.
0
Import of PDF files to a number of layers for posi-
tioning by dragging-and-dropping them to the
graphic window.
0 After the import, you can assign the pages in the

PDF file to the open job (with drag-and-drop, see
What's Behind Drag-and-Drop, page 151). The
pages in the PDF file are shown as a list. In the
screenshot below, you can see that the PDF file,
"Supertrap 3.0_de", has two assigned pages. Pages
3 and 4 are not yet assigned.
0 A double click on imported pages opens the "Doc-

ument" tab in the graphic window and displays

Browser Window ABC
the Document Inspector in the inspectors window

so that you can edit them.
0
sensitive menu when a PDF file or pages are
selected:
0 "Document Inspector"
Displays the Document Inspector. More details
can be found in Document Inspector,
page 998.
0 "Preview"
Generates previews of the pages. You can view
the preview in the graphic window. You can set
general view properties. See Default User,
0 "Hires Preview"
Generates previews of the pages. You can set
general view properties. See Hires Preview,
0 "Open with Acrobat"
The whole PDF file is opened and displayed
with Acrobat. Refer also to Select External Exe-
cutables, page 49.

ABC Browser Window
0
"Remove Document from Job"
The PDF file is deleted from the job.
0
"Reload Document"
The imported PDF file is updated in the job.
0
Deletes assignment of the selected page(s)/
1up(s) in the job. The pages/1ups in the job no
longer have any assigned content.
0
"Assign Pages"
The selected pages are assigned to the job. The
pages/1ups are assigned automatically to the
next blank pages in the job.
0
"Assign Pages..."
The Assistant that helps you assign pages dis-
plays. The Assistant shows you the position and
layer of the assigned PDF file and makes it easy
for you to assign PDF files to the job.
0
"Copy Pages to Clipboard"
The selected page/1up is copied to the clip-
board and can be pasted at any place you want,
for example, in the "Product Parts" tab > "Page
List" or in the graphic window in the "Page List"
tab. Refer also to "Paste Pages from Clipboard",
page 69.
0
"Show Page in Press Sheet"
The selected page/1up is shown in the Graphic
Window.

Browser Window ABC
Internal Resources
The "Internal Resources" tab shows you the marks
that are in the job currently open.
You can position internal resources by dragging-and-
dropping them to the "Marks" tab in the inspectors.
You can position them in the Press Sheet Inspector,
Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector or Page/1up
Inspector, depending on the parent set for the marks.
Functionality
You trigger the functions in the "Internal Resources"
tab with the Context-sensitive menu, page 213.
Exception: Working with drag-and-drop, see Marks,
page 153.
0
The "Internal Resources" tab lets you position
marks by dragging-and-dropping them to the
"Marks" tab in the inspectors. You can position
them in the Press Sheet Inspector, Folding Sheet/
Assembly Block Inspector or Page/1up Inspector,
depending on the parent set for the marks. See
Marks, page 153 for details.
0
When you select the "Marks" folder and display the
context-sensitive menu, you can create a "new
internal mark" with the following editors:

ABC Browser Window
Note: A user-defined internal mark is designed

2 only for the current job and is not available later
in the marks resources. More details about inter-
nal marks can be found in the User's Guide.
0
sensitive menu when an internal mark is selected:
0
"Edit Job Internal Mark..."
Displays the editor for the marks. More details
can be found in Marks Editor, page 1131.
0
"Replace Internal Mark"
The selected mark is replaced by a new one that
you will select.
0
"Refresh Internal Mark"
After a refresh, the selected mark shows the
present status of the mark.
0
"Copy Internal Mark to Clipboard"
The selected mark is copied to the clipboard
and can be pasted to the marks resources in
"Jobs & Resources > Marks" by selecting a folder
and displaying the context-sensitive menu.
0
"Delete Internal Mark"
The selected mark is removed from the job. If
the internal mark is available as a marks
resource, it continues to be available for later
jobs.

ABC Resources and Machines
7 Resources and Machines
General
The resources and machines must be regarded sepa-
rately from the open job. You can use them as tem-
plates when creating jobs.
Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG provides you with
a whole series of resources and machine data sets to
facilitate working with Prinect Signa Station. How-
ever, you should still create resources for your own
setup. In this chapter, we will explain how you can
create, edit and import resources to an active job.
In Prinect Signa Station, the default view shows you
the job. Proceed as follows to go to the resources view
and edit or create resources:
Select "Jobs & Resources > Resources & Machines" or
click the following button in the toolbar:
Two tabs with all the available resources and

machines display. Another tab "MDS" also displays if
you work with a Master Data Store (MDS):

Resources and Machines ABC
Click the above button again to return to the job

view.
In the "MDS" tab, it is possible to access central data in
the network for some resources. See MDS (Master
Data Store), page 428 for details.
Resources
The "Resources" tab is independent of the open job.
You can use it, for example, as an archive for existing
templates and resources.
Templates and resources are shown in a clear tree
structure. You can create group folders for your own
resources and templates using the context-sensitive
menu. You can edit, copy, delete and resave
resources. You can copy and delete templates.
All the workstations can work with the same data sets
if the default folders for saving resources and tem-
plates are filed on a server and assigned to the pro-
gram. See also Default Folder, page 48.

Note: The "Standard" folder in the group folders is a

2 read-only folder that contains shipped templates and
resources that cannot be changed. Templates and
resources are used only as templates and must be
saved, if necessary, in user-specific group folders. See
the procedure described below for creating custom
resources.
Creating Custom Resources

The following procedure is recommended for creat-
ing your own resources:
1. Create your own plate template.
2. Select "Plate Templates" in the "Jobs & Resources"
menu.
3. Mark the "Plate Template" folder and display the con-
4. Select "New Group" in the context-sensitive menu and
give it a name that you will confirm with the Enter
key.
5. Open the "Standard" group folder.
6. Mark the "SM102" standard resource and display the
context-sensitive menu.
7. Select "Copy Plate Template" in the context-sensitive
menu.
8. Now mark the new group you created and display the
9. Select "Paste Plate Template" in the context-sensitive
menu.
10. The "SM102" plate template is pasted and you can
now double-click it to edit and save it in the Plate
Template Editor.

Functionality
You trigger the functions in the "Resources" tab with
the Context-sensitive menu, page 213.
0 To import resources
Display the context-sensitive menu in the
"Resources" tab and select "Resource...".
Select the resource you wish to import. Prinect

Signa Station automatically recognizes the type of
resource you selected and presents you with only
those groups that are located in that path so that
you can save the resource. Read the section named
"To create a group folder" if you still haven't cre-
ated one.

0 Refresh
Updates the currently selected resources path if
you are working in a network.
The system looks for new or deleted groups and
resources in the currently selected path. If new or
deleted groups/resources are detected, the num-
ber found is displayed and the first element in the
list is named.
The resources are available afterwards.
0 Refresh Machines and Resources
Updates all machine and resources path if you are
working in a network.
machines/resources globally in all paths. If new or
deleted groups/resources/machines are detected,
the number found is displayed and the first ele-
ment in the list is named.
The resources/machines are available afterwards.
0 A double click on existing resources opens the edi-
tor responsible for the resource.
0 The following function is found in the context-sen-
sitive menu when a group folder is selected (top
0 To create a group folder
To be able to create a new template or resource,
you must first set up your own group folder
where you can save it.

You can save a resource to the new group

folder you created using the context-sensitive
menu in the "Resources" tab.
0 Refresh
Updates the currently selected resources path
if you are working in a network.
resources in the currently selected path. If new
or deleted groups/resources are detected, the
number found is displayed and the first ele-
The resources are available afterwards.
0 The following functions are found in the context-
sensitive menu when the folder is selected (second
0 "Rename Group"
You can give the group folder a different name.
0 "Delete Group"
The selected group folder is deleted. You can
only delete empty group folders.

0 "New resource..."
The appropriate editor displays so that you can
create a new resource.
0 "Paste resource" or "Paste Job Template, Paste
Product Part Template"
A template or resource copied beforehand is
pasted in the selected group folder.
This function is only enabled if a template or
resource was copied and is to be added to a
plausible level in the tree structure (you can-
not copy a marks resource to a group folder for
schemes resources).
In the case of a job template or product part
template, you can paste a template copied
from the read-only standard folder.
0 "Import resource..."
You can import a Prinect Signa Station
resource to one of your custom resource
groups.
0 "Export Group"
"Don't Unpack"
The elements of the selected group are copied
to the defined folder.
"Unpack"
A separate folder is created for each exported
resource. A ".html" and a ".png" file are filed
with the actual resource. The ".png" file dis-
plays a low-resolution image of the resource.

This function is for exporting schemes, for

example, for use in Prinance.
"To MDS..."
Only active with the "Papers (Printing Materi-
als)" resource if "File > Preferences > Import >
Use MDS" is not enabled but a server is defined
for MDS use.
Copies local "Papers (Printing Materials)" to an
"MDS_Standard" folder.
0 "Lock/Unlock Group"
Users of the "Administrator" and "PowerUser"
groups can lock or unlock group folders for
other users. A "PowerUser" can only unlock
groups he/she locked. You can find more
details about User Management in the User's
Guide.
sensitive menu when the templates or resources
are selected (third level in tree structure):
0 "Rename resource/template"
You can type in a different name for a resource
you created.
This does not apply to resources in the read-
only "Standard" folder.

0 "Edit resource"
Displays the editor responsible for the selected
resource.
0 "New resource"
Displays the relevant editor for creating a new
resource.
0 "Delete resource/template"
The selected resource/template is deleted.
0 "Copy resource/template"
A selected resource/template is copied and
afterwards can be added with "Paste resource/
template", for example, to another folder.
Note: You can copy a "resource/template" in a
2 read-only Standard folder and paste it then to a
folder you created (that is not write-protected).
In this folder, you can modify and save the
"resource/template" as you want.
0 "Lock/unlock resource"
groups can lock or unlock resources for other
users. A "PowerUser" can only unlock resources
he/she locked. You can find more details about
User Management in the User's Guide.
Job Templates
You will find a shipped template for a standard job in
the "Standard" folder in "Job Templates". The standard
job is called "4711_Demo" and contains a job with
eight pages for a flyer.

Create a folder as described in To create a group

folder, page 75 for your own custom job templates.
Then mark the "job" in the "Product Parts" tab in the
Browser window and save the open job as a template
with "Save job as "Resources/Job Templates"...",
page 65.
Product Part Templates

You will find shipped templates for standard product
parts in the "Standard" folder in "Product Parts Tem-
plates". Standard jobs have unique names.
folder, page 75 for your own custom product part
templates. Then mark the product part name in the
"Product Parts" tab in the Browser window and save
the product part as a template in an open job with
"Save product part as "Resources/Product Parts Tem-
plates"...", page 66.
You can also save the product part as a default for the
Job Assistant. See "Save Product Part as Default for the
Assistant..."., page 66 for details.
Plate Templates
You will find shipped templates for standard plate
templates in the "Standard" folder in the "Plate Tem-
plates" resource.
folder, page 75 for your own custom plate templates.
Mark the new folder, display the context-sensitive
menu and select "New Plate Template...". The Plate
Template Editor, page 112 displays and you can now
define your own plate template.

Schemes
You will find shipped templates for standard schemes
in the "Standard" folder in the "Schemes" resource.
folder, page 75 for your own custom schemes. Mark
the new folder, display the context-sensitive menu
and select "New Scheme...". The Folding Scheme Edi-
tor, page 1110 displays and you can now define your
own scheme.
You also have the option of studying an existing
scheme with the "Open Folding Sheet Animation"
function. Refer also to Folding Sheet Animation,
page 1225.
Marks
Shipped marks are located in the "Marks" resource.
You will find write-protected standard marks in the
"Standard" folder. You can place these marks in an
open job.
folder, page 75 for your own custom marks. Mark
and select the appropriate marks editor. The follow-
ing marks editors are available: Marks Editor,
page 1131, Text Mark Editor, page 1138, Ink
Pickup Bar Editor, page 1146, Color Control Bar Edi-
tor, page 1147 and Color Control Bar Special Editor,
page 1149. You can create your own marks using
these editors.
You can also import and edit existing marks with the
Marks Import Editor, page 1151.

You will find text marks in the "Report" folder. You

can place these marks in the list window for output of
HTML and/or PDF files. See "Save Table as HTML File...",
Papers (Printing Materials)

This resource allows you to work with the MDS. See
MDS (Master Data Store), page 428 for details.
You will find shipped templates for standard papers
in the "Standard" folder in the "Papers (Printing Mate-
rials)" resource.
folder, page 75 for your own custom papers. Mark
and select "New Paper". The Paper Editor, page 1155
displays and you can now define your own paper
(printing material).
Page and Paper Sizes

You will find shipped templates for standard paper
sizes in the "Standard" folder in the "Page and Paper
Sizes" resource.
folder, page 75 for your own custom page and paper
sizes. Mark the new folder, display the context-sensi-
tive menu and select "New Format". The Format Edi-
own page and paper size.
Plate layout
You will find a shipped template for a standard plate
layout in the "Standard" folder in the "Plate Layout"
resource.


folder, page 75 for your own custom plate layout
resources. Mark the new folder, display the context-
sensitive menu and select "New Plate Layout". The
Plate Layout Editor, page 1156 displays and you can
now define your own plate layouts.
Customer Data
You will find shipped sample customers in the "Stan-
dard" folder in the "Customer Data" resource. You can
use these customers to create a test job.
folder, page 75 for your own customer data. Mark
and select "New Customer Data". The Customer Data
Editor, page 1156 displays and you can now define
your own customer data.
Output Parameter Sets

You will find shipped templates for standard output
setups in the "Standard" folder in the "Output Param-
eter Sets" resource.
folder, page 75 for your own output parameter sets.
Mark the new folder, display the context-sensitive
menu and select "New Output Parameter Set". The
Output Parameter Set Editor, page 1157 displays
and you can now define your own output parameter
sets.

User data
In the "User Data" resource, you will find groups and
users set by Prinect Signa Station for internal user
management. All groups and users have certain per-
missions.More details can be found in the User's
Guide.
You can create, edit and delete users, provided that
you have the necessary permissions.
Report Headers
You will find shipped templates for standard report
headers in the "Standard" folder in the "Report Head-
ers" resource.
folder, page 75 for your own report headers. Mark
and select "New Report Header". The Report Tem-
plates Editor, page 1168 displays and you can now
define your own report headers.

Machines
The "Machines" tab is independent of the open job.
You can use it as an archive for existing machine
resources.
The machine resources are shown in a clear tree
structure. You can create group folders for your own
machines using the context-sensitive menu. You can
edit, copy, delete and resave machine resources.
All the workstations can work with the same data sets
if the default folders for machine resources are filed
on a server and assigned to the program. See also
Default Folder, page 48.
Note: The "Standard" folder in the group folders is a
2 read-only folder that contains shipped machine
resources that cannot be changed. The machine
resources are used only as templates and must be
saved, if necessary, in user-specific group folders.
Creating Custom Machines

The following procedure is recommended for creat-
ing your own machines:
1. Create your own platesetter.
2. Select the "Machines" tab in the "Jobs & Resources >
Resources & Machines" menu.
3. Mark the "Platesetters" folder and display the context-
sensitive menu.
4. Select "New Group" in the context-sensitive menu and
give it a name that you will confirm with the Enter
key.
5. Open the "Standard" group folder.

6. Mark the "Suprasetter" standard resource and display

the context-sensitive menu.
7. Select "Copy Platesetter Data Set" in the context-sensi-
tive menu.
8. Now mark the new group you created and display the
9. Select "Paste Platesetter Data Set" in the context-sensi-
tive menu.
10. The "Suprasetter" platesetter data set is pasted and
you can now double-click it to edit and save it in the
Platesetter Editor.
Functionality
You trigger the functions in the "Machines" tab only
with the Context-sensitive menu, page 213.
0 To import resources
Display the context-sensitive menu in the
"Machines" tab and select "Machine...".
Select the machine you wish to import. Prinect

Signa Station automatically recognizes the type of
machine you selected and presents you with only
those groups that are located in that path so that
you can save the machine. Read the section named
"To create a group folder" if you still haven't cre-
ated one.
0 Refresh

Updates the currently selected machine path if

machines in the currently selected path. If new or
deleted groups/machines are detected, the num-
ber found is displayed and the first element in the
list is named.
The machines are available afterwards.
0 Refresh Machines and Resources
Updates all machine and resources path if you are
working in a network.
machines/resources globally in all paths. If new or
deleted groups/resources/machines are detected,
the number found is displayed and the first ele-
The resources/machines are available afterwards.
0 A double click on existing machines opens the edi-
tor responsible for the machine.
0 The following function is found in the context-sen-
sitive menu when a group folder is selected (top
0 To create a group folder
To be able to create a machine, you must first
set up your own group folder where you can
save it.

You can save a machine to the new group

folder you created using the context-sensitive
menu in the "Machines" tab.
0 Refresh
Updates the currently selected machine path if
machines in the currently selected path. If new
or deleted groups/machines are detected, the
number found is displayed and the first ele-
The machines are available afterwards.
sensitive menu when the folder is selected (second
0 Rename Group
You can give the group folder a different name.
0 Delete Group
The selected group folder is deleted. You can
only delete empty group folders.
0 New "press data set"
Displays the relevant editor for creating a new
machine data set.
0 Paste press data set"
A machine data set copied beforehand is
pasted to the selected group folder.
This function is only enabled if a machine data
set was copied and is to be added to a plausible
level in the tree structure (you cannot copy a
filmsetter resource to a platesetter resource).

0 "Import press data set"

You can import a Prinect Signa Station press
data set to one of your custom press groups.
0 "Export Group"
"Don't Unpack"
"Unpack"
A separate folder is created for each exported
machine. A ".html" file is filed with the actual
machine. This file shows the machine data.
0 "Lock/Unlock Group"
groups can lock or unlock group folders for
other users. A "PowerUser" can only unlock
groups he/she locked. You can find more
details about User Management in the User's
Guide.
sensitive menu when machines are selected (third
0 "Rename press data set"
You can give the press data set a different
name.
0 "Edit press data set"
Displays the editor responsible for the selected
machine.

0 "New press data set"

Displays the relevant editor without any
machine parameters for creating a new
machine data set.
0 "Delete press data set"
The selected machine is deleted.
0 "Copy press data set"
The selected machine data set is copied and
afterwards can be added with "Paste Press Data
Set", for example, to another folder.
Note: You can copy a "machine data set" in a
2 read-only Standard folder and paste it then to a
folder you created (that is not write-protected).
In this folder, you can modify and save the
"machine data set" as you want.
0 "Lock/unlock press data set"
groups can lock or unlock machines for other
users. A "PowerUser" can only unlock machines
he/she locked. You can find more details about
User Management in the User's Guide.
Filmsetters
You will find shipped Heidelberg filmsetter data sets
in the "Standard" folder in the "Filmsetters" machine
resource.
folder, page 717 for your own filmsetters. Mark the
new folder, display the context-sensitive menu and
select "New Filmsetter Properties". The Filmsetter and
Platesetter Editors, page 1170 displays and you can
now define your own filmsetter.

Platesetters
You will find shipped Heidelberg platesetter data sets
in the "Standard" folder in the "Platesetters" machine
resource.
folder, page 717 for your own platesetters. Mark the
select "New Platesetter Properties". The Filmsetter and
Platesetter Editors, page 1170 displays and you can
now define your own platesetter.
Sheetfed Presses
You will find shipped Heidelberg sheetfed press data
sets in the "Standard" folder in the "Sheetfed Presses"
machine resource.
folder, page 717 for your own sheetfed presses. Mark
and select "New Sheetfed Press Properties". The Sheet-
fed Press Editor, page 1172 displays and you can now
define your own sheetfed press.
Web Presses
You will find shipped Heidelberg web press data sets
in the "Standard" folder in the "Web Presses" machine
resource.
folder, page 717 for your own web presses. Mark the
select "New Web Press Properties". The Web Press Edi-
own web press.

MDS
The "MDS" tab is only active if you enabled "Show MDS
Resources as Table" in "File > Preferences > Import".
This tab shows all available MDS resources in a clear
structure.
The MDS resources display in the usual folder struc-
ture if the check box is not enabled.
This modification is designed solely for an easy, clear
view of the MDS resources.
Old view

New view

ABC Graphic Window
8 Graphic Window
Graphic Functionality
The graphic view has five tabs showing you five differ-
ent views of the job currently selected.
The graphic view changes according to the tab you
selected ("Press Sheet", "Folding Sheet/Assembly
Block", " Page List", "Press Sheet List" and "Document"),
allowing you to check and edit the selected job.
To edit a job, you can display the inspector for the
part shown in the graphic view using the context-sen-
sitive menu. The context-sensitive menu presents the
inspector that matches the tab you are in. A change in
the inspectors window is also immediately seen in
the graphic window.
You can drag-and-drop elements from the Browser
window ("Contents" tab) and list window to the
graphic window and place marks from the Press
Sheet / Folding Sheet / Page Inspectors to the graphic
window. Dragging-and-dropping to the graphic win-
dow is an elementary step in the workflow. You can
find more details about drag-and-drop in What's
Each of the tabs has practical graphic tools. More
details can be found in Graphic Tools, page 81.
On the pages which follow, you will learn how to han-
dle the graphic tools and about the wide range of
functions that you can use in each tab.
Graphic Tools
Measured Data
The measured data are shown in the "Press Sheet",
"Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" and "Document" tabs.

Graphic Window ABC
The "X", "Y" coordinates show the current mouse cur-

sor position. You can set a measuring position or cre-
ate a frame with the shortcut "command key + Shift
key" while holding down the mouse button. The val-
ues in "W" and "H" refer to the width and height of the
frame.
Channel
The color channel is shown in the "Press Sheet", "Fold-
ing Sheet/Assembly Block" and "Document" tabs.
The "Channel" list box shows you which colors are

used on the active press sheet, folding sheet/assembly
block or single page.
You must have an imported, separated PDF file for the
multi-channel display to work.
To check single separations and any spot colors, select
the separation/spot color you want to check in the list
box. The selected color is displayed.
All colors are displayed when you select "colored"
(composite view).
Default setting: colored

ABC Graphic Window
Zoom
The zoom is shown in the "Press Sheet", "Folding
Sheet/Assembly Block", "Press Sheet List" and "Docu-
ment" tabs.
The "Zoom" list box shows you the zoom factor in

which the press sheet, the press sheet list, the folding
sheet/assembly block or single page will be displayed.
To change the zoom factor, select the one you want
from the list box or mark the box and type in a value.
"Auto" automatically calculates and shows the largest
possible full size of the press sheet or folding sheet/
assembly block in the window.
Default setting: Auto(matic)
Standard Tools
To select an object. Click an object that can be

selected. This object then has a yellow frame and you
can move it holding down the mouse button.

Graphic Window ABC
To zoom up the entire graphic. A "+" appears in the

magnifying glass. Hold down the "Alt" key to zoom
down. A "-" appears in the magnifying glass. You can
scale up a certain part of your work by drawing a
bounding box.
Hand tool: Lets you move scaled-up objects into the
view frame. Click and move the mouse to do so. You
can also select the tool by holding down the space
bar and clicking the mouse.
To set a measuring point and create a frame: This
tool lets you set measuring points or create a frame
and read off the values in the read-only boxes on the
bottom left. You can now also create internal marks
the size of the frame you created. See Creating Inter-
nal Marks, page 88 for details.
As an alternative to the tool: "command key + Shift
key"

ABC Graphic Window
User-defined dimensions:
This tool lets you measure from one defined edge
(e.g. paper edge, page edge, etc.) to another defined
edge.
Example:
You are going to measure the distance between the
edge of a page and that of the paper.
0
Move the mouse pointer to the page edge.
0
The starting edge is shown as a red bar.
0
Hold down the mouse button and drag the
mouse pointer to the paper edge.
0
The target edge is shown as a green bar.
0
Let go of the mouse button.
0
The distance from the page edge to the paper
edge is shown along a line between the red and
green bar.
Note: The "Dimensions" option below "View Prop-
erties" must be enabled.
0
Use the shortcut "Alt + click" to delete the dimen-
sions.
Dimensions on/off:
Click this tool to show or hide the values of the "user-
defined dimensions" tool (see above). All the parame-
ters enabled in "View Properties > Dimensions" are
also shown. See View Properties and Enable/Disable
Layers, page 86 for details.
Front/Back
The "white" button lets you view the front and back
sheets side by side. The "green" and "yellow" buttons
let you view the front or back sheet respectively.

Graphic Window ABC
You can trigger the same function as the "white" but-

ton with a double click on the colored caption bar of
the front or back sheet. See Mouse and Keyboard
Shortcuts in Graphic Window, page 24.
View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers
Click the "View Properties" button to display a dialog

where you can configure the way the graphic window
will appear on your screen.
The "View", "Dimensions" and "Grid" tabs are available
for the configuration of the graphic window.
The "Save as Default" button at the lower part of the
window lets you save a setting immediately in the
preferences. This setting is effective even after the
program is exited.
Note: When you work with several languages, the
2 active layer is displayed in the "View" tab.
Select the layer you want if several layers can be

shown. The active layer is shown directly in the
graphic window. Several or even all the layers can be
shown.
Files are imported to different layers in the Browser
window > "Contents". You will find an example in the
User's Guide.

ABC Graphic Window
In the "View" tab, you can show or hide the following

items in the graphic window:
0
Contents of Page/1up
The page content appears as a preview.
You can cut down computing time if the contents
are hidden in documents with a large number of
pages.
0
Outline mode display
You can hide all symbols that are not relevant for
output.
0
Imaging Window
The blue-and-white line is shown or hidden.
0
Tiling Numbers
0
Background Marks
0
Foreground Marks
0
Ruler
0
Ink Zones
The ink zones defined for a press are shown as
lines. The press selected in the plate template is
taken as the basis for this. The values for "Number"
and "Width" in "Ink Zones" in the Press Editor are
used.
This functionality facilitates the positioning of
color control bars, for example.
Default: All the parameters with the exception of the
ink zones are shown.
In the "Dimensions" tab, you can show size data for the
following parameters in the graphic window:
The size data shown can also be displayed in different
colors. To do this, click the color button and change
the colors, using the sliders, to the color you want.

Graphic Window ABC
Press Sheet
0
Paper Position
0
Paper Size
0
Subject Position
0
Subject Size
0
Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Positions
0
Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Size
0
Page/1up Positions
0
Positioning across folding sheets
0
Page/1up Size
0
User-defined
Displays "User-defined dimensions:, page 85".
0
Shows small values
Also shows very small measured data.
Default: Dimensions are hidden.
In the "Grid" tab, you can show a grid in the graphic win-
dow:
You can set the size (in the selected unit of measure)
and the color of the grid.
The grid is not magnetic and is only a visual aid.
Default: Grid is hidden.
Creating Internal Marks

The "Frame" tool (display with the shortcut "com-
mand key + Shift key") lets you create all Prinect Signa
Station mark types as internal marks. The bounding
box defines the position and size of the mark.

ABC Graphic Window
You can use the following marks tools in the graphic

window to create "internal marks". These internal
marks are not filed in the marks resources and are
only available in the current job.
You will find the marks that are assigned to the job in
the "Browser window > Internal Resources" or in the
relevant inspectors in the "Marks" tab.
To add an "internal mark" to the global resources, go
to the "Browser window > Internal Resources", select
the mark and display the context-sensitive menu.
Select "Copy Internal Mark to Clipboard" and paste
the mark in "Marks Resources" in an inspector with
"Paste Mark".
Marks Editor
This tool allows you to display the Marks Editor the

size of a rectangle you created beforehand and to cre-
ate and position a mark. See the Marks Editor,
page 1131 to learn how this function works.
Text mark
This tool allows you to create and position a text

mark the size of a rectangle you created beforehand.
0 Using the measurement tool, draw a rectangle
whose size and position are that of the text mark
you want. (To do this, press the command and
Shift keys and create the rectangle holding down
the left mouse button. Release the mouse button
first).

Graphic Window ABC
0
When the rectangle is created, a toolbar appears
at the bottom of the graphic window.
0
Click the text mark button.
0
The Text Mark Editor opens, displaying a text
mark the size of the rectangle you created. See Cre-
ating a Text Mark, page 1138 for details on what
to do next.
Creating an ink pickup bar
This tool allows you to create and position an ink

pickup bar the size of a rectangle you created before-
hand. See the Ink Pickup Bar with Measurement Tool,
page 1321 to learn how this function works.
Creating a cover mark and other internal marks
This tool button allows you to create a cover mark, a

cutting die mark, a line type mark for the glue area. a
color control bar or a special color control bar. You
can also import a mark that you can then create and
position and whose size is defined by the frame you
created beforehand.
0 Using the measurement tool, draw a rectangle
whose size and position are that of the mark you
want. (To do this, press the command and Shift
keys and create the rectangle holding down the
left mouse button. Release the mouse button first).

ABC Graphic Window
0
When the rectangle is created, you are now able to
use the above tool button at the bottom of the
graphic window.
0
Select the tool you need.
0
If you are creating cover marks, see Cover Marks
(Job-internal Cover Mark / "CoverClippath"),
page 1317, Create Cover Mark from CAD Lines,
page 1321 and Define cover mark from line type
for glue area, page 1321. In the other cases, the
Marks Editor, page 1131, the Color Control Bar
Editor, page 1147, the Color Control Bar Special
Editor, page 1149 or the Marks Import Editor,
page 1151 displays, depending on what you
selected, where you can then edit your mark. The
mark displays in the size you created the rectan-
gle.

Graphic Window ABC
Press Sheet
The "Press Sheet" tab shows you a graphic of the press
sheet of the product part currently selected, with all
the objects placed on the press sheet.
You need the Press Sheet Inspector to edit a press
sheet. The Press Sheet Inspector displays when you
double-click the press sheet (or select it in the con-
text-sensitive menu). A change in the inspectors win-
dow is also immediately seen in the graphic window.
You can display other press sheets in the product part
by double-clicking them in the Browser window or
list window. A simple click on a press sheet is enough
if the graphic window is already active.
Functionality
0
Display of the press sheet with the option of show-
ing front and back at the same time. See Tile Front
/ Back, page 827 for details.
0
Positioning of elements by dragging-and-dropping
them from the Browser window or list window.
For more details, see the User's Guide or What's
0
Import of pages to different layers. See View Prop-
erties and Enable/Disable Layers, page 86 for
details.
0
Creation of "internal marks" for the job currently
open. See Creating Internal Marks, page 88 for
details.

ABC Graphic Window
0
Configuration of the graphic view as you like it
and display of the units of measure for objects. See
View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers,
0
Selection of color layers. See Channel, page 826
for details.
0
Setting zero on the ruler
See Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts in Graphic
Window, page 220.
0
Working with measurement tools.
Window, page 220.
0
Setting magnetic snap lines
Window, page 220.
Functionality Using the Context-sensitive Menu

The following functions are available when you dis-
play the context-sensitive menu in the "Press Sheet"
tab in the graphic window:
0
Displays the Press Sheet Inspector, page 985 in
the inspectors window.
0
Prints the currently selected press sheet. The Print
Job ..., page 1217 window displays.
0
"Align"
Prerequisite: Can only be selected in the "Montage"
working mode.

Graphic Window ABC
You must have selected at least two assembly

blocks. You align them based on the first assembly
block you selected.
You select and deselect assembly blocks with the
shortcut "command key + mouse click".
You can align to the top, bottom, left and right.
0
"Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector"
Displays the Folding Sheet Inspector, page 966
or the Assembly Block Inspector, page 980 in the
inspectors window.
0
Falzbgen/Montageblcke neu anordnen...
Prerequisite: Can only be selected in the "Imposi-
tion" and "Montage" working modes.
The folding sheets/assembly blocks can be rear-
ranged automatically but also manually by enter-
ing gap data.
0
"Swap Front and Back Folding Sheet"
tion" and "Montage" working modes. Front and
back must also have been defined. This function is
not designed for "Work-and-tumble" or "Work-and-
turn".
You can, for example, match plates to certain col-
ors with this function.
0
"Swap Folding Sheet"
tion" working mode.
0
Falzbogen verschieben

ABC Graphic Window

tion" working mode.
0
"Delete folding sheet/assembly block"
tion" and "Montage" working modes.
Deletes the active folding sheet/assembly block.
0
"Create new assembly block"
work mode.
Creates a new assembly block. This function is
identical to that in the Assembly Block Inspector,
page 980.
0
"Duplicate Assembly Block"
work mode.
The active assembly block with all its contents is
duplicated. The duplicated assembly block lies
directly on top of the original assembly block.
0
"Fit Marks and Bleeds"
Prinect Signa Station checks the spacing between
the folding sheets or assembly blocks on the
selected press sheet. Any cut marks and/or bleed
on adjacent blocks are automatically deleted.
It's a good idea to use this function after moving
blocks manually because overlapping elements
can be overlooked in the graphic window.
In addition, the color control mark is fit to the
subject (AutoClip to subject).

Graphic Window ABC
0
"Marks"
"Enable Clip Path"
The clip path of a mark is now active and dis-
played accordingly. A mark with a clip path is
highlighted by a blue line. The clip path is high-
lighted by a green/black line if a mark is selected.
"Disable Clip Path"
The clip path of a selected mark is ignored.
"Edit Mark..."
You can open and edit a selected mark with the
relevant editor for that mark.
You will find more details about the various
marks editors in the chapter "Editors, page 111"
or in the chapter "Working with Marks" in the
User's Guide.
Marke duplizieren
You can duplicate one or more selected marks.
The "Duplicate Mark..." window opens where you
can enter the following data:
- Number of copies you want to create
- Offset of the copies in horizontal direction (X)
- Offset of the copies in vertical direction (Y)
It's also possible to enter negative values for an off-
set.
"Delete Mark"
The mark you selected is deleted after you confirm
an alert message.

ABC Graphic Window
0
"Graphic"
"Save as..."
You can save the current press sheet as a graphic
file in the Portable Network Graphics Format
(.png).
"Print..."
You can output a copy of the current press sheet to
a printer.
"Print All..."
You can output a copy of each press sheet in the
job to a printer.
0
"Preview"
Generates previews (72 dpi) of the pages. You can
set general view properties. See Preview
Attributes, page 429 for details.
0
"Hires Preview"
Generates high-resolution previews (144 dpi) of
the pages. You can set general view properties. See
Hires Preview, page 429 for details.
0
Deletes assignment of the selected page(s) in the
job. The pages/1ups in the job no longer have any
assigned content.
0
If you copied a page or 1up from a PDF file to the
clipboard in the "Contents" tab in the Browser win-
dow, you can paste it in anywhere you want. See
"Paste Pages from Clipboard", page 69 for details.

Graphic Window ABC
0
Nutzennummer zuweisen...
and "Packaging" working modes.
The function only works in conjunction with the
"StationNumber" mark. See Step 1: Assigning the
"StationNumber" mark to the 1up, page 1313
and Step 2: Assigning the station numbers,
page 1314 to learn how to use and handle this
function.
Display and Functions

ABC Graphic Window
1. Blue-and-white line
Marks the maximum imaging window. The imaging
window is based on the properties of the selected
filmsetter or platesetter types.
2. Gray area (color can be selected)
Marks the plate size. This is based on the plate size
defined in the plate template.
3. White area (color can be selected)
Marks the defined paper size. The paper size is
defined in the Product Part Inspector in the "Plates"
tab.
4. Green line
Marks the defined paper margin (cut block) of the
folding sheets / assembly blocks.
5. Blue line
Marks the lead edge of print (baseline + gripper mar-
gin)
6. Red bars (color can be selected)
Marks the critical printed area.
7. White punches
Displays the press punches. The punches are only
symbolic and don't reflect the shape they really have
at the press.
8. Yellow line (not in the screenshot)
An object is selected and shown with a yellow frame
when you click in the graphic window.
An object can be a folding sheet, assembly block, page
or a mark.
Example:
You first select a folding sheet in the graphic window
> "Press Sheet". After this, you can select a page on the
folding sheet with another click.

Graphic Window ABC
9. Dark gray area (pages)

Marks the page (imposition) or 1up (montage). The
light gray area around the page or 1up indicates the
trim.
10. Page numbers
0
White/black numbers: The page number is white
if pages are not assigned and with a gray back-
ground. The page number is black if pages with or
without a preview are assigned. Magenta marks
without a preview.
0
Green page number: The page numbers of special
master pages and tiles are green to tell them apart
more easily.
Folding Sheet/Assembly Block

In the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab, you will
see the first folding sheet or assembly block of the job
currently selected, with all the marks relating to the
folding sheet.
You need the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector
to edit a folding sheet/assembly block. You can display
the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector using the
context-sensitive menu in this tab.
You can also display the Page/1up Inspector if you
selected a page/1up on a folding sheet/assembly
block.
A change in the inspectors window is also immedi-
ately seen in the graphic window.
You can display other folding sheets/assembly blocks
in the job by double-clicking them in the Browser
window or list window.

ABC Graphic Window
The "clip path" tool is enabled if a 1up is selected in a

packaging job ("Packaging" working mode). See the
chapter Packaging, page 131 for information about
working with the "clip path" tool.
Functionality
0
Display of the folding sheet or assembly block
with the option of showing front and back at the
same time. See Tile Front / Back, page 827 for
details.
0
Positioning of elements by dragging-and-dropping
0
details.
0
Editing a packaging job with the "clip path" tool.
See the chapter Packaging, page 131 for details.
0
Creation of "internal marks" for the job currently
open. See Creating Internal Marks, page 88 for
details.
0
Configuration of the graphic view as you like it
and display of the units of measure for objects. See
View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers,
0
Selection of color layers. See Channel, page 826
for details.

Graphic Window ABC
0
Setting zero on the ruler
Window, page 220.
0
Working with measurement tools.
Window, page 220.
0
Setting magnetic snap lines
Window, page 220.

play the context-sensitive menu in the "Folding Sheet/
Assembly Block" tab in the graphic window:
0
inspectors window.
0
"Page/1up Inspector"
Displays the Page/1up Inspector, page 991 in the
inspectors window.
0
"Document Inspector"
Displays the Document Inspector, page 998 in
0
"Preview"
Generates previews of the pages. You can set gen-
eral view properties. See Default User, page 47
for details.

ABC Graphic Window
0
"Hires Preview"
eral view properties. See Hires Preview, page 429
for details.
0
Deletes assignment of the selected page(s) or
1up(s) in the job. The pages or 1ups in the job no
longer have any assigned content.
0
You can paste the selected page/1up that you cop-
ied to the clipboard, for example, in the "Job" tab >
"Page List" or in the graphic window in the "Page
List" tab to anywhere you want.
0
"Clip Path (Packaging)"
You can select this function in the "Packaging"
mode and in the "Montage" mode if the "Packag-
ing" option is enabled. See Editing the Clip Path,
0
"Create New Profile"
This function can only be selected in the "Packag-
ing" mode. See the Functions in a 1up Context-sen-
sitive Menu, page 1310.

Graphic Window ABC
0
Change or Create Station Number...
This function makes it easy for you to rearrange
the 1ups to match any changes made to a job.
Mark the 1ups you wish to change. The possible
station indices display in a list box. You have two
options here. Change the selected 1up(s) to an
existing station number or select the last index in
the list and use it to create a new station number.
The "Adjust Back Automatically" check box also
gives you the option of assigning a station index
automatically to the back as well. The station
index of the back then always corresponds to that
of the front plus 1.
0
"Marks"
"Edit Mark..."
You can open and edit a selected mark with the
relevant editor for that mark.
You will find more details about the various
marks editors in the chapter "Editors, page 111"
or in the chapter "Working with Marks" in the
User's Guide.
Duplicate Mark
You can duplicate one or more selected marks.
The "Duplicate Mark..." window opens where you
can enter the following data:
- Number of copies you want to create
- Offset of the copies in horizontal direction (X)
- Offset of the copies in vertical direction (Y)
It's also possible to enter negative values.

ABC Graphic Window
"Delete Mark"
The mark you selected is deleted after you confirm
an alert message.
0
"Graphic"
"Save as..."
You can save the current folding sheet/assembly
block as a graphic file in the Portable Network
Graphics Format (.png).
"Print..."
You can output a copy of the current press sheet to
a printer.
"Print All..."
You can output a copy of each press sheet in the
job to a printer.
0
3D View
This function is no longer necessary as a result of
migrating to the PDF 3D format (automatic 3D dis-
play). This requires Adobe Acrobat as of version 9
and that you have purchased a license for "Prinect
Signa Station Packaging Pro".
"Assign Station Numbers..."

Can only be selected in the "Montage" and "Packag-
ing" working modes. The function only works in
conjunction with the "StationNumber" mark. See
Step 1: Assigning the "StationNumber" mark to the
1up, page 1313 and Step 2: Assigning the station
numbers, page 1314 to learn how to use and
handle this function.

Graphic Window ABC
0
Open Folding Sheet Animation
This displays the folding sheet animation of the
active product part. See Folding Sheet Animation
with Data Pages, page 1227 for details.
Measured Data
See Measured Data, page 81 for details.
Channel
See Channel, page 82 for details.

ABC Graphic Window
Zoom
See Zoom, page 83 for details.
Tile Front / Back
See the Front/Back, page 85.
View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers
See the View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers,

page 86.
Display the Marks Editor
See the Marks Editor, page 1131.
Creating a Text Mark
See the Text mark, page 89.
Creating an ink pickup bar
See the Creating an ink pickup bar, page 810.

Graphic Window ABC
Creating a cover mark and other internal marks
See the Creating a cover mark and other internal

marks, page 810.
Move Content Data
Only in the "Packaging" mode if the "Packaging"

option is enabled.
The cursor changes when you click this tool, and you
can position the content of the 1up as required by
clicking and moving it.
Define line type for the clip path

option is enabled. See the chapter Packaging,
Define cover mark from line type for glue area

option is enabled. See the chapter Packaging,

ABC Graphic Window
Clip Path Tool
Only in the "Packaging" mode and in the "Montage"

mode if the "Packaging" option is enabled. See the
chapter Packaging, page 131 for details.
User-defined dimensions
See the User-defined dimensions:, page 85.
Page List
The "Page List" tab shows you in graphic form all the
pages defined for the selected product part. The pages
are shown as empty pages if contents were not yet
assigned or as previews after they were assigned con-
tents.
The page list does not show the pages on the press
sheet or folding sheet but only the content of the
placeholders.
Functionality
0
Deletion of page assignments using the context-
sensitive menu.
0
View of the assigned PDF file in the PDF reader.
Double click on the preview.
0 Positioning of elements by dragging-and-dropping

Graphic Window ABC
0
details.
0
"Pages per Row": Selection of how many pages are
to be shown side by side in a row.

The following functions are available when you click
a page/1up and display the context-sensitive menu in
the "Page List" tab in the graphic window:
0
"Preview"
for details.
0
"Open with Acrobat"
The whole PDF file is opened and displayed with
Acrobat. Refer also to Select External Executables,
page 49.
0
job. The pages in the job no longer have any
assigned content.
0
You can paste the selected page/1up that you cop-
ied to the clipboard, for example, in the "Job" tab >
"Page List" or in the graphic window in the "Page
List" tab to anywhere you want.
You can also use this function in the Browser win-
dow using the context-sensitive menu in "Jobs >
Page List" >.

ABC Graphic Window
0
"Assign Blank Page"
Can only be selected in the "Imposition" and "Auto-
matic Imposition" working modes.
The page size defined in the scheme is used auto-
matically. The subsequent pages with their con-
tents shift back one page.
pages that were not in the PDF document must be
pasted to certain positions.
You can also use this function in the Browser win-
dow using the context-sensitive menu in "Jobs >
Page List" >.
0
Show Page in Press Sheet
This shows the first press sheet on which the
selected page is positioned. This function is
designed to help you check a page if changes to it
are made.

Display
Pages per Row

Selection of how many pages are to be shown side by
side in a row.
Press Sheet List

Display of all the press sheets for front and back print-
ing of the product part currently shown.
All the press sheets in the job are shown if "All Press
Sheets" is set.
ABC Graphic Window
Functionality
0
Selection of a press sheet for viewing or editing in
the "Press Sheet" tab.
Double-click the press sheet you want to display it
in the "Press Sheet" tab for viewing and, if neces-
sary, editing it. The Press Sheet Inspector also dis-
plays
0
Output of a selected press sheet (highlighted by a
yellow frame) via the context-sensitive menu.

play the context-sensitive menu in the "Press Sheet
List" tab in the graphic window:
0
0
0
"Print Product Part..."
Prints the currently selected product part. The

Graphic Window ABC
Display and Function
Zoom
In the press sheet list, the auto display is set perma-

nently to 8% in contrast to all other tabs.
Tool bar
See Graphic Tools, page 81 for details.
All Press Sheets

This shows the press sheets of all product parts in the
job.

ABC Graphic Window
Document
Display of the single PDF document pages in the job
or imported PDF document pages in the Browser win-
dow.
You can view the single pages of a PDF file in the "Doc-
uments" tab and, if necessary, correct the trimmed
size.
Functionality
0
The trim box has a blue-and-white frame when it
displays, and you can change it interactively. You
can position the selected trim box (yellow frame)
by clicking and moving it to any position you
want or you can make it bigger or smaller. You can
see the data of these changes in the Document
Inspector in the "Page" tab. See Document Inspec-
tor, page 998 for details.
0
The Document Inspector displays when you dou-
ble-click a page so that you can edit it.

play the context-sensitive menu in the "Document"
tab in the graphic window:
0 "Document Inspector"
0
"Preview"
for details.

Graphic Window ABC
0
"Hires Preview"
eral view properties. See Hires Preview, page 429
for details.
0
"Open with Acrobat"
page 49.
Measured Data
See Measured Data, page 81 for details.

ABC Graphic Window
Channel
See Channel, page 82 for details.
Zoom
Tool bar
See Graphic Tools, page 81 for details.

ABC Inspectors Window
9 Inspectors Window
Where You Can Select Inspectors

0 In the menu bar > "Inspectors"
0 Directly in the toolbar
0 In the Browser window either with the context-
sensitive menu of a selected item or a double click
on the selected item
0 In the graphic view, with the context-sensitive
menu in certain displays or by double-clicking a
selected section.
0
In the list view, in certain tabs, by selecting a row
in the list and then selecting the item in the con-
Details in the Inspectors

There are eight inspectors. Each inspector has its own
special task. For example, the Job Inspector is
designed for administrative tasks and consequently
can be used for all jobs. The Product Part Inspector
contains data for the selected product part. In other
words, the data are applicable not just for one press
sheet or folding sheet but for all such sheets in the
product part.
You can, of course, make changes to single elements
in the Folding Sheet, Press Sheet or Page Inspector
and then apply them to all the elements in the prod-
uct part. A summary of the details can be found in the
following inspector descriptions:
Job Inspector
Opening an existing job template
Administrative data about the job and customer.
Info boxes showing the "customer number" and job

Inspectors Window ABC
history.
Input for the new versioning with the "Versions" box.
Setting the colors that will be printed in the JDF work-
flow.
Information about the separation colors in the job.
Configure attributes as placeholders
Product Part Inspector

Six tabs can display, depending on the working mode
you selected. The tabs correspond to the six successive
steps in the Job Assistant (the "General" tab is the
same as that in the Job Inspector). Only the "General"
and "Plates" tabs appear in the "Montage" working
mode. The "General", "Plates" and "Packaging" tabs
appear in the "Packaging" working mode.
0
General
Opening an existing product part template
Input of job details for each product part
Details about the work mode in the product part:
Imposition: Only with a set number of pages
Automatic Imposition: Imposing without a set
number of pages
Montage: Creating assembly sheets
Packaging: Creating a packaging job
Defining the start conditions (press sheet, folding
sheet and pages)
Naming the pages
0
Master Pages
Details about the page type, trimmed size, addi-
tional space, trim and positioning of the pages.
0
Binding
Details about the binding methods
Details about creeping
Automatic bottling
Details about the gripper saddlestitcher

Definition of a cover bonding or glue line

Setting parameters for automatic gap computa-
tion
Assignment of cut blocks
0
Marks
Setting and removing automatic marks (e.g. cut
marks, folding marks) with a "click" on the appro-
priate check boxes
Colors and scaling for automatic marks
Data for Collating Mark
Fixed cut marks
0
Plates
Opening of a product part template
Selection and display of plate templates
Plate template as a gang run form
Selection of the placement rule for the back (sin-
gle side, work-and-tumble, work-and-turn)
Paper definition
Position of the subject
0
Schemes
Selection of schemes
Details about page spacing and gaps
Assigning special master pages
Defining the folding sheet order
Creating folding sheet groups
Details about bottling (from the "Binding" tab)
Creating the gang run form
Press Sheet Layout
0
Packaging
Selection of the CFF2 file
Information about the profiles and setting the
profiles required
Definition of the placement rule for the 1up
Launching the licensed "Packaging Pro" option

Folding Sheet Inspector

Details about the folding sheet/folding scheme. You
can enter/change some of the parameters such as the
folding sheet name, positioning, sheet sizes and page
spacing and gaps.
You can copy settings of the current folding sheet to
similar folding sheets.
Details about the marks on the folding sheet are also
displayed. You can add, change and delete marks.
Assembly Block Inspector

Details about the assembly block and 1up. You can
enter/change some of the parameters such as the
assembly block name, copies, positioning, 1up for-
mat and placement rules.
Details about the marks on the assembly block are
also displayed. You can add, change and delete marks.
Cut marks can be created automatically.
Press Sheet Inspector

Details about the press sheet. You can enter/change
some of the parameters such as the sheet name, plate
width, press sheet data like the number of colors
used, selected template and paper sizes and center
offset.
In addition, there is a list with the folding sheets/
assembly blocks assigned to the press sheet and their
details.
You can copy settings of the current press sheet to
similar press sheets.
Details about the marks on the press sheet are also

The Press Sheet Inspector has special control ele-

ments for optimization of jobs that were created with
the "Sheet Optimizer" option enabled. See Sheet Opti-
mization, page 141 for details.
The Press Sheet Inspector has options for modifying
versions preallocated for output if you have jobs that
were created with the enhanced versioning function.
See Version Preallocated for Versioned Output (Ver-
sioning Only), page 988 for details.
Page/1up Inspector
Details about the trim size, about working with dif-
ferent layers and creeping.
Individual placement options for page and 1up con-
tents.
You can copy the placement settings of the current
page to all pages of the product part.
Details about the marks on the press sheet are also

Document Inspector
Details about the PDF documents assigned to the job,
e.g. name, size, number of pages and separations in a
document.
Details about the trimmed size and separation colors
for every data page.
Placement rule in the placeholder (offset, orienta-
tion).
Packaging Inspector
See section Product Part Inspector - "Packaging" tab,

Parameters of the Inspectors in Prinect Signa Station

The inspectors are the main control elements for cre-
ating a job in Prinect Signa Station. The changes you
make in the inspectors always affect all the parts in
the job.
You can find some parameters at several different
places in Prinect Signa Station, for example, data
about the folding sheet/folding scheme or press
sheet/plate:
0
In the relevant inspectors, e.g. Folding Sheet
Inspector, Press Sheet Inspector
0
In the Product Part Inspector, in the Schemes,
Plates tabs
0
In the Job Assistant, in the successive steps, e.g.
folding schemes, plates
The inspectors are set up in the order you would nor-
mally work with.
When Do I Use What?

You can create a new job only with the Job Assistant.
You then use the inspectors to check and correct your
data or make additional specific settings.

You can also create just one part of the job with the
Job Assistant and generate certain parameters later
and then add them to the job, for example, a new
folding scheme with the Folding Scheme Editor.
In addition, you can also turn an existing job into a
new one with the inspectors. As you can see, you use
them as it suits you.
Job Inspector
Displays, for example, when you select "Job Inspector"
in the "Inspectors" menu.
Administrative Data
Job from Template

You can save the job data as a template. Do this in
the Browser window by calling up the context-sen-
sitive menu and selecting "Save job as 'Resources/
Job Templates'". You can then display this job
again with "Job from Template" or list it in
"Resources > Job Templates". The job template con-
tains all the Prinect Signa Station job data, except
for the job number, job name, customer name and
customer ID.
Job and customer
Job Number
By default, the job number is part of the full job name
and is used for finishing, e.g. in the JDF workflow
with the Prepress Manager and Prinect Prinance. It
can be made up of alphanumeric characters, e.g.
"49rs".

Job Name
Is used to spot a job easily and by default is part of the
full job name, e.g. "labelsSM102".
Customer Name
Is also used to spot a job and can be part of the full job
name.
Details about the customer. You can save customer
data as a template and call them up again when
required.
0
Folder button
You can save it as a template in "Choose Customer"
and call it up again with this button when
required.
Customer ID
Additional customer code (e.g. customer number).
The customer ID is not a default part of the full job
name.
0
Info box
Details about the customer.
Full job name

The full job name is made up as follows:
Job number_job name.extension
In our example, the full job name is as follows:
"49rs__LabelsSM102.sdf"

Note: In "File > Preferences > Names" you can select

2 and add single placeholders in the "Job File Name"
group. Afterwards, these placeholders appear auto-
matically in the full job name. See Job File Name,
Job Details
Details about the target date, volume, number of lay-
ers and planned colors.
In addition, an enhanced versioning option was
added. If you select more than one layer, you can use
the many enhanced options in "Versions". Details of
this can be found in the User's Guide or below in Ver-
sion, page 910.
You can set the "target date" using a calendar that you
display by clicking the arrow on the right. Click the
arrow again to quit the calendar without changing
the date.
Number of Layers
In certain cases, PDF documents must be placed on
different layers so that they can be printed one on top
of the other in a job, for example, if it has several lan-
guages. The list box to the right will be enabled and
the layers displayed if you enter more than one layer.
You can now change a layer name in this box, e.g. by
entering the language. You can output this name on
the press sheet using a text mark. A maximum of 50
layers can be used.
You can assign the layers certain names in "Prefer-
ences > Names" that can then be used as default layer
names when you enter several layers in the Job
Inspector. You can change these names at any time in

the Job Inspector. You will find more details about

working with several layers in Default Layer Names,
page 49.
Example of a bilingual document:
Layers Level
Images Base
German Text
English Text
Level
"Level" is an additional identifier of the content of a
layer. It is not mandatory to enter it.
The "Level" parameter is submitted in the JDF work-
flow and, for example, allows proofing of the level in
question.
Version
The following description should help you decide
whether you will work with the new versioning as of
Prinect Signa Station 4.0 or whether you will use the
"old" layer versioning.
The new versioning variant is set if you enter a num-
ber greater than '1'. If you don't, the old method is
used, and the new functions do not appear in the user
interface.
New versioning:
The combination of "layers" and "versions" now gives
you a wide range of options. Click the button on the
right beside the option chooser. The "Version Editor"
opens.

You will see the defined "layers" in the left column.

The middle column shows the defined versions (it
does not have to be a language version). The right col-
umn shows the selected combination of layers in a
version.
After you mark a version, you can then assign the lay-
ers you want to the version or you can let them be
assigned automatically.
You will find an example with a detailed description
of the new functions in the User's Guide.
Prevent Resource Balancing

When this check box is enabled, the active job is
saved and its current, implemented resources are fro-
zen.
When you open the job later, the obligatory question
of "Update resources..." would not appear and there is
no update.

This setting can be useful for repeat jobs in order to

base your work on the original resources.
Default for JDF and job ticket

This option lets you define how many colors will be
used in printing when you create layouts in "JT" or
"JDF". For a PDF marks layer, the combi mark that
matches the colors set here is then used.
It only makes sense to define colors if no content
pages were positioned. If they were, the colors set for
the content pages are used during output.
History
Created on/Modified on
Prinect Signa Station shows the dates in these boxes.
You cannot change them.
0
Info box
Displays all the details about the job history.
Created by/Modified by
The name of the user logged in to Prinect Signa Sta-
tion appears automatically in this box. You cannot
change the name afterwards.
Job Notes
This box allows you to enter additional information
about a job. You can define the note as a text mark
placeholder. This allows you to position and print it
out. See Creating a Text Mark, page 1138 for details.

Colors
List of the colors of all PDF pages placed on the press
sheets. This list is empty if no PDF page is placed so far
and all the press sheets are still empty. This is where
you define how layers will be output.
Color Definitions
Allow Spot Colors to BCMY

The handling of color control bars has been
enhanced. It is now possible to map spot colors to the
"BCMY" process color code when this option is
enabled. By doing this, you can avoid gaps in the con-
trol control bar.
Default: The option is set by default for new jobs, it is
disabled by default for existing jobs (older than ver-
sion 4.5).
Issues arose in the Heidelberg workflow due to a rigid
order of colors if a job did not have all the process col-
ors but spot colors as substitutes or even only had
spot colors.
Now it is possible that color mapping is done auto-
matically by Prinect Signa Station. In this process, the
spot colors are mapped to the BCMY placeholders.
Use Global Mark Color Mappings

"Global Mark Color Mappings" is disabled by default
when you create a new job.
When this option is disabled, color mapping of all the
press sheets with the relevant surfaces (front and
back) is done in the Press Sheet Inspector.

When the option is enabled, color mapping can be

done for the entire job, either automatically or man-
ually. In this case, you cannot use the function in the
Press Sheet Inspector.
Automatic Color Mapping

"Automatic Color Mapping" is the default setting. The
system automatically tries to avoid gaps in the color
control bar.
User-defined Color Mapping

The "Color Definitions" window displays. You can
now set all separation colors manually to mark color
placeholders. Click the "In mark" code and select the
link you want.
We recommend that you use "Automatic Color Map-
ping" in the workflow.
Available colors
Colors that are in the PDF pages assigned to the prod-
uct part.
output as
Click an element in this column to display the output
options for spot colors. This parameter lets you
replace spot colors by C, M, Y or K or by another spot
color in the PDF document and print them. In this
way, for example, you can replace similar looking
spot colors by another color, thus saving ink/inking
units.
0
as process colors
The spot color is converted to the process colors C,
M, Y and/or K that are written and printed to the
plates.

0
is ignored
The spot color is removed from the list and not
printed.
Ignore in Mark
Only if "Ignore in Mark" is enabled in "File > Prefer-
ences > General".
You can disable spot colors in marks manually. The
spot color is ignored in color control bars in combi
marks and also in the workflow with "Allow Spot Col-
ors to BCMY". See Column for "Ignore in Mark",
Dark
Only if "Column for Darkest Color" is enabled in "File
> Preferences > General". See Column for Darkest
Color, page 44 for details.
Cutting Die
Only if "Column for cutting die color" is enabled in
"File > Preferences > General". See Column for cutting
die color, page 43 for details.
Background color
Only if "Column for 'Background Colors" is enabled
in "File > Preferences > General". This is where you can
define which colors will be the background colors.
See "Background Colors":, page 1132 for details.

Default Screen Angles
Default Screen Angles for RIPs

Settings in this group do not affect the Heidelberg
workflow (MetaDimension, etc.). The values are used
only when you output to third-party RIPs.
You can define the screen angle manually for each
single color in the color table that then appears (may
be necessary for some third-party workflows).
To change a color, click the "Angle" column and key
in the value you want.
The modified screen angle is taken into account dur-
ing output.
Attributes
You can define specific job attributes in "File > Prefer-
ences > Names". These display in this group and can
be filled with job-specific data. See Free Text Replacer
Names, page 411 for details.
Procedure:
Create a text mark with the Text Mark Editor, add, for
example, "FreeReplacer 1" or the name entered in
"File > Preferences > Names" ("printer") as the place-
holder. The relevant variable then appears, in our
example "$[FreeReplacer1]".
After you save the text mark, position it, for example,
on the folding sheet.

After you positioned the text mark, you can change

the placeholder text at any time in "Attributes" in the
Job Inspector. Simply type in your text that then auto-
matically appears immediately in the text mark. You
can check the modified text at once in the graphic
window.
This means that you can change the text of a text

mark at any time without having to first position a
new mark.
Product Part Inspector

When you create a new job, in the Job Assistant select
the working mode that you need for your product
part in the "Product Part Definition" tab. You can also
select a template from your resources with "Product
Part from Template, page 918". The following work-
ing modes are available: "Imposition, page 919",
"Automatic Imposition, page 920", "Montage,
page 921" and "Packaging, page 922".
The mode you select is shown in the "General" tab in
the Product Part Inspector.
The tabs that are displayed depend on the working
mode you selected.

Six tabs appear when you select "Imposition" or "Auto-

matic Imposition": "General", "Master Pages", "Bind-
ing", "Marks", "Plates" and "Schemes".
Only the "General" and "Plates" tabs appear when you
select "Montage".
The "General", "Plates" and "Packaging" tabs appear
when you select "Packaging".
The "General" and "Plates" tabs display in all the work-
ing modes.
Note: Individual changes you made to a product part
2 with other inspectors (e.g. folding sheet offset with
the Press Sheet Inspector) can be lost if you modify
this product part with the Product Part Inspector!
You should give much thought to how you will create
a product part, and only make changes to single
objects in the product part when you are sure that
you don't have to make any further inputs/changes
with the Product Part Inspector.
Definition
Product Part from Template

You can save the product part as a template. Do
this in the Browser window by calling up the con-
text-sensitive menu and selecting "Save product
part as 'Resources/Product Part Templates'." You
can then display this product part again as a tem-
plate (by clicking the folder button on the right) or
list it in "Resources > Product Part Templates". The
product part template contains all the Prinect
Signa Station product part data without data
pages. The administrative data of the job are not
part of the product part. See also the Job Inspector,
page 97.

Main Features
Name
You can type/change the name of the selected prod-
uct part in this box.
Job Details in Product Part
Active
This is where you can name specific job details for
each product part in a job with several product parts.
You will find a description for an efficient workflow
with gang run forms in the User's Guide.
Work Mode
The work mode you select defines the structure of a
product part. The content of a job is shaped by what
or how many working modes you selected. A job can
have different working modes (product parts).
Imposition
A certain number of pages are imposed based on a
folding scheme you selected. You only create as many
sheets as you need for the number of pages. You
define the number of pages in "Page Total". In con-
trast to automatic imposition, no sheets are added or
removed automatically.
In this mode, you can process different folding
schemes and paper and plate templates in one job.
This is important, for example, if the page total can-
not be processed with one folding scheme (20 pages
can be imposed with a 16 folding scheme and a 4 fold-
ing scheme).

This option lets you modify a page total you defined

with the Job Assistant.
Note: Changing the page total subsequently does not
2 mean that the number of sheets are automatically
matched to this total. The user must change this man-
ually.
You can change the number of sheets in the Product
Part Inspector > "Schemes" tab in "Number" in the
table so that the value shown in "Unplaced Pages" is
"0". You can also add another, suitable scheme for the
"unplaced pages" using the folder button.
You can also change the names of single pages, for
example, to make it easier to tell the cover of a job
from the body. This makes it much easier in some
documents to place single data pages correctly on the
press sheet. To do this, you must select the row with
the page you want or a page range and then choose
"Change Page Names" in the context-sensitive menu.
A consecutive number is automatically added to the
page name you entered (I becomes I1, I2, I3, ...) if you
selected several pages. If the page name you entered
is a digit, consecutive numbers are generated as page
names starting with this number (32 becomes 32, 33,
34, ...). You can find more details in the User's Guide.
Different folding sheets can be placed on the plate
template if you enabled the "Gang run form" option
(in the Product Part Inspector in the "Plates" tab or in
the Job Assistant in "Printing Plates".
Automatic Imposition
In this working mode, an undefined number of pages
are imposed automatically based on the folding
scheme you selected. You do not have to define a set
number of pages.The required number of press

sheets is created automatically (duplicates of the first

sheet) when you assign data pages later. In this mode,
it's not possible to combine different folding
schemes.
You can use this mode, for example, if you wish to
assign documents with a large number of pages to a
layout in the Prinect Prepress Manager. The process-
ing of books in particular is a typical case for an auto-
mated workflow.
Montage
In this working mode, pages are not imposed on the
basis of a selected folding scheme, but single pages,
also known as 1ups, are created in assembly blocks/
sheets.
In this mode, Prinect Signa Station assumes that only
one sheet will be needed for the assembly. An exam-
ple here would be a large-format film. You can fill this
sheet with 1ups of the pages or place the pages freely
on the sheet by dragging-and-dropping them there.
The Product Part Inspector has two tabs if you
selected "Montage" when creating a job: "General" and
"Plates". The "General" and "Plates" tabs are the same
as in the "Imposition" and "Automatic Imposition"
modes.
This working mode is very suited for the production
of postcards, business cards or labels.
In addition, "Sheet Optimization" is also found as an
option in "Montage". See Sheet Optimization,
page 141.

Packaging
The option is only available if you have a license for
"Packaging". Details about packaging are found in
Packaging, page 131.
Comment
It's a good idea to comment the special features of a
product part if you wish to use it as a template.
Start Conditions
First Press Sheet

In automatic press sheet generation, you can change
the starting number of the first press sheet manually.
All following press sheets are incremented accord-
ingly.
Defines the start of the first press sheet in a product
part. Enter a five if you want the number of the first
press sheet in the product part to be a five (can be
seen immediately in the graphic window and is part
of the sheet label in output).
First Folding Sheet

This defines the number of the first folding sheet in
the product part. The folding sheet number affects
calculation of the collating marks (starting position)
and the folding sheet label.
First page
You can change the number of the first page. Page
numbers and page name are affected by this.

Pages in Product Part / Page Names

For a description, see the section Imposition,
page 919.
Master Pages
"Master Pages" contain data about the page formats
for the "Imposition" or "Automatic Imposition" work
modes.
This is where you can define the trimmed size, the
trim, the page size for special master pages and the
position of the page content for every master page.
You can also define whether just one master page,
two master pages or special master pages will be used
in the product part. The values apply to all the pages
of the product part.
Master Page Types and Trimmed Size
Types
In this list box, you can select whether you need one
or more master pages in the product part. You will
only need one page type if all the pages in the job
have the same trimmed size and if the user data (PDF
pages) that will be assigned later have a similar struc-
ture. In other words, that they can be handled the
same when they are being positioned within the mas-
ter page. In this case, the "Current Type" list box is
dimmed.
Current Type
0
Right page / Left page
Select "Left pages" if the user data (PDF pages) have
different positions for the right and left pages. You
now can specify the values for this page. Now

select "Right pages". Except for the placement rule,

the values for the left page also apply to the right
page.
This may be necessary, for example, if different
positions for a left and right page were assigned in
Quark XPress and there is no trim box in the PDF
document.
Note: Only one page type must be created if the PDF
2 document has a trim box because contents/pages
with different positions are automatically aligned
using the trim box. You can view the trim box of the
PDF documents in the Document Inspector and, if
necessary, correct it there.
0
Custom
Select "Custom" if a folding scheme has different
formats, e.g. a letterfold with shorter pages. The
display/input options below are then enabled. You
can also define any number of special master
pages. This allows you to use different formats in a
scheme. You can assign a special master page to a
page in the scheme either in the Folding Sheet
Inspector > Scheme display, page 967 or in the
Product Part Inspector > "Schemes" tab > "Gaps and
Master Pages, page 955". The page then has a
green page number.
A case where you would use a special master page
is with a larger page in an advertising leaflet or
with fold-out pages in a magazine.
To override the automatic bleed:
There are special cases where a bleed must jut into
the adjacent page. You can allow this by creating a
special master page with a custom bleed because
the automatic bleed cannot be applied to special
master pages.

0
Setup of a special master page
Click the icon below to display a dialog where you
can enter a name for the special master page. The
values shown or modified below it then apply to
the special master page with this name.
You can click the folder button and select an exist-

ing format from the resources. The name is then
automatically used for the special master page.
You can delete the displayed special master page
and its values from the list by clicking the trash-
can icon.
Width/Height
You can select DIN formats and other standard sizes
directly using the folder button on the right in the
"Choose Page or Paper Size" dialog. You can generate
and/or call up other non-standard formats in this dia-
log. You can also create or modify page sizes in the
"Jobs & Resources > Resources & Machines" menu in
"Page and Paper Sizes", see also Page and Paper Sizes,
page 712.
You can change the values of a page manually in the
text boxes.
Page-related Bleed
You use page-related bleed to define the area with
user data that will be seen in the output.

The value you enter in this box refers to the trimmed

size. A value of 0 mm means that only the area of user
data within the trimmed size can be seen. A value of
3 mm makes sure that the visible area projects
beyond the trimmed size by 3 mm on all sides.
This step is required to avoid white flashes when the
motifs of the data pages only go as far as the edge of
the trimmed size.
Prinect Signa Station automatically makes sure that
the bleed doesn't jut into an adjacent page, i.e. the
value entered is applied (e.g. 3 mm) everywhere
where there is enough space. At other edges, the
value is reduced until both bleeds meet in the middle
between the pages concerned.
The text box has a default value taken from "Prefer-
ences > Bleed Default".
To fit the PDF page to the trimmed size, you can select
the "Placement rule for assigned pages > Automatic"
option if there is a trim box.
If you selected "Use custom values" in "Custom Bleed
and Trim Allowance", only the values shown there are
used and the bleed specified here is ignored.
The bleed for the pages at the back margin is set to
the value defined in "Preferences > Defaults > Bleed ...
in routing margin" if you use a binding method that
includes a routing margin. Normally, the routing
margin should not have any print data.
Custom Bleed and Trim Allowance

"Inner" and "Outer" always refer to two-page spreads.
For a left page, "Outer" is a bleed on the left, for a right
page the bleed is on the right. For a left page, "Inner"
is a bleed on the right, for a right page the bleed is on
the left.

Custom Bleed Values

These values are used if "Use custom values" is
enabled. The value defined in "Page-related Bleed" is
then ignored.
In a few rare cases, you must define a custom bleed
for certain margins. For example, a bleed may have to
be reduced at an edge because a print control mark
would be covered otherwise.
Single Page for Folding Sheet

This function can be used only if "Use custom values"
is enabled. The value defined in "Page-related Bleed" is
then ignored.
In PDF documents covering more than one page of a
folding scheme, there was no satisfactory automatic
solution for setting folding marks and for numbering
pages.
This new function now makes the automated produc-
tion of, for example, tri-folds, poster folds, book/pub-
lication covers, fold-out pages and package inserts
much simpler.
Example of a cover page:
There is a cover page 1, for which we will use a
scheme with three page positions plus spine (two
A4-pages 2, 5mm spine 3, a flap 4).

We will only use page position C_1, i.e. the flap, for
positioning of the cover page.
4 2 3
The flap is defined as a "Single Page for Folding

Sheet". The page is automatically dimensioned to fit
perfectly when it overlaps the other two page posi-
tions including bleed.
You will find an example of how to handle the func-
tion in the User's Guide in the production example
for "Versioning". Header of the subject "Cover: "Job
Assistant > Master Pages".

Trim Allowance for Pages

The page is made bigger by the values specified in
these boxes. In other words, material/paper is added
for a larger trim. This changes the position of the
page on the press sheet. The trimmed size, however,
doesn't change.
Note: The values specified in these boxes affect the
2 gap width that you can define in the Folding Sheet
Inspector, in the Product Part Inspector > "Schemes"
tab or in the Job Assistant. You can think of these val-
ues as a minimum gap width that are always kept
even if you enter a smaller value for the gap in the
inspectors or place the pages on the sheet automati-
cally ("Automatic Gaps").
Segmented Folding Sheets

Makes a simpler, automated production of small for-
mats possible, e.g. small-format, square books or cal-
endars. Several different single segments (e.g. small-
format, square books) are grouped together to one
large production folding sheet using the "Layers"
function so that the single segments lie side by side.
Cutting is done only after the last fold.
The automated function calculates the target size
(trimmed size), the bleeds and outer edges of the sin-
gle segments on the sheet from the sizes and data you
entered, it shows the 1ups in different colors and sets
the cut marks.
To set a mark for each segment, select a mark with
the new "Segment" placeholder in "Product Part
Inspector > "Marks > Folding Sheet Label".
Folding sheets are segmented

"Automatic" segmenting of the folding sheets starts.

Size of Single Segment/Page after Separating Cut

Enter the target size you want (trimmed size) of the
single segment (e.g. size of the small-format, square
book).
The trimmed size changes automatically in "Master
Page Types".
Segment Order on Folding Sheet

Copies X, Y: Enter the number of segments that are to
be side by side (X) or one below the other (Y).
A layer is created automatically for each segment
(copy) in "Job Inspector > Number of Layers. The layers
can then be filled later several times with the quan-
tity you want.
Copying is possible in one direction only. A value is

automatically reset to "1" if your input is wrong.
The trimmed size changes automatically in "Master
Page Types", the copies are added up corresponding
to the trimmed size.
Gaps X, Y: Enter the gap spacing if segments are to be
side by side (X) or one below the other (Y).
Placement rule for assigned pages

This is where you set how the PDF page content will
be placed within the trimmed size.
A trim box for the PDF page is always defined at Pri-
nect Signa Station. This box is then matched to the
trimmed size.
"Automatic" mode
In this mode, the trim box defined at Prinect Signa
Station is automatically fit to the trimmed size. Ori-
entation is at the bottom left corners.

The trim box at Prinect Signa Station is defined as fol-

lows:
0
Case 1: The PDF page has a trim box. The trim box
at Prinect Signa Station is then fit to the PDF trim
box.
0
Case 2: The PDF page doesn't have a trim box but a
crop box. The trim box at Prinect Signa Station is
then fit to the PDF crop box.
0
Case 3: The PDF page has neither a trim box nor a
crop box. The trim box at Prinect Signa Station is
then fit to the PDF media box.
"By user (view options)" mode

The trim box defined at Prinect Signa Station is fit
to the PDF media box.
0
"Offset":
0
"From Trim Box": In this mode (as in the "Auto-
matic" mode), the trim box is fit to the
trimmed size. The bottom left corners are the
reference points.
0
"Center": The page content is centered on the
trimmed size if you select this option. This
option is helpful if the user data are centered
in the PDF.
0
"Custom": This option lets you define your own
offset for the data page in relation to the
trimmed size in X/Y direction.
You can define settings for scaling, orientation
and mirroring for all three offset types.
For more details about the bounding boxes, see the
section Bounding Boxes, page 37.

Note: All settings that you define in "Placement rules

2 for assigned pages" overwrite any settings made in
the Page/1up Inspector.
Binding
The tab is only enabled in the "Imposition" and "Auto-
You can set the following parameters in the "Binding"
tab:
0
Select the binding method
0
Enable creeping and define values for it
0
Enable automatic bottling
0
Define a gripper margin for front or back fold
0
Define cover bonding for residual glue (web)
0
Define a glue line (web)
0
Define defaults for automatic gap computation
0
Assign cut blocks
Binding Methods
Prinect Signa Station automatically defines the pagi-
nation and any necessary creeping for the selected
binding method (pagination depends on the folding
scheme/folding rule you selected).
The trim for the pages at the back margin is set to the
value defined in "Preferences > Trim ... in routing
margin" if you use a binding method that includes a
routing margin. Normally, the routing margin
should not have any print data.
0
Perfect Binding

In perfect binding, the folded sheets are placed on

top of each other, milled off at the back and glued.
Note: Automatic gap computation generates a gap
2 between the left and right page that is equivalent to
the maximum routing margin.
0
Saddlestitch
In saddlestitching, the folded sheets are nested. As
a result, the final page number of the assembled
page not only depends on the folding scheme
selected, but also on the size of the publication.
In this binding method, the application automati-
cally pairs up the highest and the lowest page
numbers and then calculates the number that
each individual page will really have.
Note: Automatic gap computation set the gap
2 between the two-page spreads to 0 mm.
0
Come & Go
In the "Come & Go" binding method, the first and
last book block are printed on one folding sheet,
the second and second last block together, then
the third and third last, etc. The folded sheets are
stacked one on top of the other until the middle is
reached or passed. The last fold between the two
blocks is not made. Instead the sheets are cut. Now
both piles of blocks are placed one on top of the
other. In this way, your book is produced.
Additional 1ups of parts of a book can be pro-
duced by utilizing a folding sheet to print addi-
tional book blocks that are also cut off and then
gathered with the other blocks. The aim of this is
to reduce the number of plate changes. Page num-
bering is the same as in saddlestitching. Creeping
values, on the other hand, are similar to those in
perfect binding.


0
Come & Go Two Books
This option also allows you to image two book
blocks on one folding sheet. One block has ascend-
ing page numbers, the other descending page
numbers. In other words, mirror-inverted sheets
are produced, with two whole books being
imaged. This mode is used if the plates would have
been necessary anyway because of the number of
sheets or if rotation of the first folding sheets
would result in an inaccurate production. Gener-
ally, closed and open sides of the folding sheets
alternate.
Note: If you create a product part in this binding
2 mode, the number of pages is automatically doubled
and twice as many folding sheets created. For exam-
ple, to print a book with 48 pages, enter 48 pages as
your page total. You need three folding sheets for
this. Prinect Signa Station, however, doubles this
number to 96 pages and 6 folding sheets.
Automatic gap computation generates a gap between
the left and right page that is equivalent to the maxi-
mum routing margin.
0
Cut and Stack
In this binding mode, a stack of sheets can be
divided into two parts after printing, with one
part consisting of the upper half of the page num-
bers and the other of the lower half. For example,
in a 16-page book, one stack has pages 1 thru 8 and
the other stack pages 9 thru 16. You must create a
folding scheme where the page numbers make
allowance for this, e.g. after folding for two pages,
1-3 (front), 4-2 (back).


0
Mixed Binding
This binding method includes different binding
modes, namely perfect binding and saddlestitch-
ing.
For example, three folding sheets are assembled to
one book block with saddlestitching. Afterwards,
the book blocks are compiled to one book with
perfect binding or thread-stitching.
0
No Rule
In the No Rule mode, you can create all the gaps
the same, at least on the right and left. This means
that all the sheets are the same, that they are not
folded just cut, for example, punched sheets in a
loose leaf binder.
Note: Automatic gap computation divides up the
2 available space evenly between all gaps.
0
Sewn
In a publication with thread-stitching, the folded
book blocks are stacked on top of each other, with
the sheets bound by thread.
This method is analog to perfect binding but there
is no routing margin.
0
Leaflet Fold
In a publication with a leaflet fold, the pages will
not be cut. This means that the spacing between
the pages must not change.


Even pages on right
This setting is for books in Arabian-speaking coun-
tries. In such countries, books are opened from left to
right and read from left to right. You must create a
special folding scheme for this.
Creeping and Bottling
Creeping
For saddlestitch-bound publications (such as maga-
zines), the paper thickness makes the inner pages
shift outward (i.e., away from the spine). If the publi-
cation is trimmed after binding, the inside pages will
have narrower outer margins than the outside pages.
The same is true for perfect binding when large
sheets with many pages must be folded often.

This schematic diagram shows how the required

value for creeping is determined in saddlestitching.
Creeping off
The function is disabled and ignored.
Automatic (paper thickness)

The creeping values are calculated automatically
from the paper thickness if you select this option. You
can generate or modify the paper definitions in the
Product Part Inspector > "Plates" tab or in "Papers
(Printing Materials)" in the "Jobs & Resources" menu >
"Resources & Machines". See also Papers (Printing
Materials), page 712.
Paper Thickness Factor

The paper thickness is multiplied by this factor to get
the creeping you want for each sheet. See above.
Manual
Enable this option if you wish to enter your own
inner/outer creeping values. The values refer to all
the folding sheets in the product part. The data for
"Inner" and "Outer" always refer to the first scheme of
the product part. The program calculates creeping
per sheet from these values and applies it to the
entire product part.
For more details about enabling creeping for a single
page, see Creeping, page 995.
Creeping Value Inner

This is where you enter the value by which the inner-
most pages of the first scheme have to be offset to
compensate for their creeping.

(Creeping value) Outer

This is where you enter the value by which the outer-
most pages of the first scheme have to be offset to
compensate for their creeping. The difference
between the internal and external adjusted margins
is the creeping margin. By entering positive values,
you will shift the pages outward; by entering negative
values, you will shift the pages toward the spine.
The distances between all the other pairs of pages in
the book will be calculated according to these
extreme values. The creeping margin values are
related directly to the page spacing you have set in
the scheme, see also Folding Scheme Editor,
page 1110. These values will be added to or sub-
tracted from the page spacing.
The scheme used determines whether automatic
creeping is possible or whether manual creeping is
necessary.
Generally, the program can calculate the required
creeping margin values itself.
Creeping by
Offset
Is set by default and described above.
Scaling
Makes the pages bigger or smaller depending on their
position in the scheme, while staying the same at the
back margin and matching them to the nominal posi-
tion on the outer edges.
AutoBottling
Remember the following conditions when you enable
this function:

0
Binding Methods
Automatic bottling is not allowed with "Come &
Go" and "Cut & Stack" binding methods.
0
Folding Sheet
The folding rule must end with a cross fold, e.g.
"x1Y1", and may not have a minus sign.
0
You may not make any changes or corrections to
the scheme after you enabled the automatic func-
tion.
0
In web presses with ribbons, combinations with
single pages and 3/4 pages may result in problems.
0
"AutoBottling" must be disabled if you use the
scheme "F16-11_li_4x2".
0
Fold types "zigzag" and "letterfold" can be problem-
atic.
0
Pagination
The "Accordion Fold" pagination mode may not be
selected in the Folding Scheme Editor.
More information about "bottling" and what manual
corrections you can make can be found in Bottling,
page 958.
Gripper Collator / Cover Bonding / Glue Line

Normally, a strip of paper/material is used to pull the
folding sheets on to the saddle if a saddlestitcher is
used to collate the sheets. The position of this strip on
the sheet depends on the folding sheet scheme and
basically means that the folding scheme is slightly
asymmetric on the paper sheet.
Prinect Signa Station's automatic gap computation
includes the values you enter for this option and cal-
culates all the gaps so you have the correct front and
rear gripper fold after folding.

0
No rear fold/front fold
There is no gripper margin for the saddlestitcher or
there is a page offset for a gripper margin for the rear
or front fold. You must enter the values in "Size of
Gripper Margin".
0
Size of gripper margin
This is where you define the size of a page offset
for the rear or front fold for the gripper margin of
the saddlestitcher.
Cover Bonding
Only displays if "Show check items for cover bonding
and glue line" is enabled in "File > Preferences > Gen-
eral".
In "Cover Bonding", paper is added to the folding
sheet. In book production, this additional space must
be created at the lower edge of the cover so that resid-
ual glue can be absorbed when gluing the cover to the
book and that it does not flow into the pages.
Note: The function is available as of Prinect Signa Sta-
2 tion
jobs.
version 3.x. It is not possible to use it on older
0
None
0
On the First Folding Sheet
Paper is added to the first folding sheet of the
product part.
0
On the Last Folding Sheet
Paper is added to the last folding sheet of the prod-
uct part.

Glue Line
Only displays if "Show check items for cover bonding
and glue line" is enabled in "File > Preferences > Gen-
eral".
A glue line is needed when producing booklets with
web presses. A glue line is automatically applied
before folding. This serves the purpose that no fur-
ther gluing is needed after folding.
The folded double pages are glued together at the
sides along a narrow strip in the back margin. This
line is not noticed when leafing through the pages.
There should be no color in the glue line as this could
impair adhesion.
This can be done in one of the following ways:
0
By Moving
You can move the content of each page affected
away from the back margin by the value set in
"Glue Line Width". The page bleed becomes
smaller.
0
By Scaling
The visible page content is retained and scaled
(made narrower) so that the glue line in the back
margin of each page is kept free by the value set
for width.
0
Options
Normally, the glue line is defined on the outer-
most pages. However, in certain production condi-
tions, it may be wanted also on the innermost
pages (for example, to glue a cover to a booklet).
Choose the option accordingly.

Parameters for Automatic Gap Computation

0
Use routing margin
Use this option to define whether or not a routing
margin will be included. You must do this if a job
with thread-stitching is imposed as a job with per-
fect binding although there must be no routing
margin for thread-stitching (see also Binding
Methods, page 932).
Max. Head Gap/Max. Gap

The value entered is used for the automatic calcula-
tion of the gaps (in the Product Part Inspector >
"Schemes" tab) when you tick this option.
The value for the max. head gap only affects the page
head, the value for the max. gap all the gaps. The gaps
are created only up to the size entered, even any
larger head gap, if the max. gap is enabled. This
means that the folding sheet can be smaller than the
paper.
Remember that the extra space > "Master Pages" tab is
taken to be the minimum gap and the max. gap is
added to this. The automatic gap is used if you disable
the maximum gap. In this case as well, remember the
values you entered in the preferences > "Defaults" tab.
Gaps between a two-page spread such as routing mar-
gins are not affected by this.
For example, if the gap at the head is always to be
exactly 10 mm, then enter 5 mm in "Master Pages >
Trim Allowance for Pages > Top", set the max. head
gap to 0 mm and tick the box. The head gap is now
automatically exactly 10 mm when the gaps are cal-
culated automatically.

Cut Block Assignment

In the "Imposition" and "Automatic Imposition"
modes, it is also possible to customize the cut block to
meet your different needs.
Cut blocks that are defined as described below are
written to the data for a CIP3 or JDF output and as a
result their data can be used by cutters.
Cut blocks are shown as a "green line" in the graphic
window.
To pages/1ups
The single pages on a folding sheet automatically
become cut blocks.
This can be a good idea if a scheme with the same
page numbers, e.g. when you create postcards, was
selected. Generally, however, the "Montage" mode
covers this type of production.
To folding sheets
Folding sheets including their margins automatically
become cut blocks.
This is what you normally want and is the default.
To scheme
Only the scheme without the folding sheet margins
becomes a cut block.
The margins must not be in the cut block if the fold-
ing sheet is to be trimmed to size before folding.
Marks
You can set the following parameters in the "Marks"
tab:

0
Set/remove automatic print control marks
0
Define parameters for automatic print control
marks
0
Define fixed cut marks (for "Creeping")
Automatic Placement of Print Control Marks

Cut marks, folding marks, folding crosses, folding
sheet cuts, folding sheet labels, fold lay marks and
collating marks are automatically set for the product
part if you enable one of these options.
Note:
2 0
When cut and folding marks are set, the program
always checks whether the gaps on the folding
sheet/assembly block are big enough for the auto-
matic marks and for the page bleed. If necessary,
the marks are deleted and the bleed reduced so
that they don't jut into the adjacent page. This
applies for front and back printing.
0
You can make space for the marks or the bleed
with the "Fit Marks and Bleeds" function in the
context-sensitive menu in the graphic view if
there is not enough space because you moved the
assembly blocks so close together.
0
The automatic fit for bleeds is not used if a custom
bleed is set on a special master page. There are spe-
cial cases where a bleed must jut into the adjacent
page. You can allow this by creating a special mas-
ter page with a custom bleed ("Master Pages" tab).
The cut marks and folding sheet labels are set in rela-
tion to the page and are listed in the Page/1up Inspec-
tor in the "Marks" tab (see Marks, page 995).

The folding marks, folding crosses, folding sheet cuts,

fold lay marks and collating marks are set in relation
to the folding sheet and are listed in the Folding
Sheet Inspector in the "Marks" tab (see also Folding
Sheet Inspector, Marks, page 967).
You can select and modify all seven types of marks in
the lists of the inspectors just named or in the
graphic view in the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block"
tab.
In "Preferences > Resources > Marks Default" you can
assign marks for these seven types of marks that are
then set automatically. See also Marks Default,
page 419.
Notes on Using Marks

Manually set marks are handled in the Product Part
Inspector based on the following rule:
The Product Part Inspector generates all folding and
press sheets again if you change the layout, e.g. page
size, gaps, paper size. etc. In this case, any manually
set marks are lost. The layout is not recalculated and
the marks are kept with other types of changes such
as creeping on/off, position of the page contents, etc.
You can only select automatically set marks in the
Product Part Inspector. You can set manual marks in
the Press Sheet Inspector, Folding Sheet/Assembly
Block Inspector and Page/1up Inspector.
Marks Colors/Scaling and Collating Values
Colors for automatic marks

This is where you can select which separations will be
printed with marks.

Data for Collating Mark

The collating mark is a control device that allows you
to check whether the folding sheets have been assem-
bled completely and in the correct order.
You can use the default mark CollatingMark, a line
approximately 11 mm long and 1 mm wide contain-
ing the folding sheet number, if you wish to use a col-
lating mark. You may, however, use any mark, includ-
ing marks created by yourself for this purpose.
0
Position: Back margin - At foot - Outer - At head
This is where you select on which edge of the out-
ermost page the collating mark will be found.
"Back margin" is set by default.
0
Distance: Automatic - Defined
This is where you can select the amount by which
the collating mark will be shifted per sheet. Select
"Automatic" for the offset to correspond to the
height or width of the unscaled mark, depending
on the direction and rotation. You can also define
your own offset.
0
Range: Automatic - From: To:
This is where you can define the first and last posi-
tion of a collating mark on your reference side.
Select "Automatic" if you want the height or width
of a page to be taken as the range, starting with
"0".
0
Direction: Ascending - Descending - Zigzag - Zagzig
In general, a thick rule is printed on the fold
between the first and last pages, which is then vis-
ible on the spine of the finished folded sheet. The
first collating mark is at the top of the first folding
sheet. For each subsequent sheet, the rule is offset

by its own length, so that for a correctly and com-

pletely assembled book, even steps are obtained.
This step can be ascending or descending. Collat-
ing is ascending - descending in the case of zigzag
and descending - ascending for zagzig.
Note: The position must always start with "Back
2 margin" if you select "Ascending".
Last sheet First sheet
Collating
mark
Sheet Label Parameters

Position the folding sheet label as you need it.
Other General Marks Definitions
Fixed Cut Marks in Creeping

The cut marks are not moved in creeping. This affects
the ProofColor layer, gives you a better check of the
proof.
Plates
Load Plates and Schemes from Product Part Template

You can now load a plate template incl. its scheme,
placing mode, paper definition, marks, etc. to the job
as a product part template.

You can only load product part templates that have

"Gang run form" enabled. You must enable this
option in "Product Part Inspector > "Plates > Selected
Plate Template".
You can file standard plate templates with additional
custom settings (scheme, marks, paper, etc.) as prod-
uct part templates and load them later to new jobs to
make work easier for you. See "Save product part as
"Resources/Product Parts Templates"...", page 66 for
details about saving product part templates.
List of Selected Plate Templates

The plate templates selected for the product part are
shown in the list.
Using the buttons on the right, you can load or
replace plate templates to the product part or remove
them from there:
Folder button
Click the folder button and select a created plate tem-
plate in the "Choose Plate Template" window that
then appears. You can now add it to the product part.
To replace a plate template

Click this button and then replace the plate template
selected in the list by another one.
Note: The paper size does not change. An error mes-
2 sage displays if the paper already defined has become
too big because of the different plate. In such a case,
first change the paper size and then replace the plate.

Trashcan
You can delete the plate template selected in the list
and its values from the product part by clicking the
trashcan icon.
Selected Plate Template

This is where you can check and change the size of
the selected plate template.
You can also create or modify plate templates in
"Plate Templates" in the "Jobs & Resources" menu, see
also Plate Templates, page 710.
Gang run form

Can only be used in the "Imposition" mode.
You can place different folding sheets on the plate
template if you select this option.
A gang run form is different from normal plate tem-
plates in that only the exact number of press sheets
you set in "Number" is created. The folding schemes
are placed only on the first press sheet, the others are
generated automatically based on the same pattern.
The "AutoPosition Subject" function is disabled if
"Gang run form" is enabled.
The position and orientation of the folding schemes
is set in the Product Part Inspector in the "Schemes"
tab > Active Inspector Section "Press Sheet Layout".
See Press Sheet Layout, page 961 for details.
Number
Can only be edited if "Gang run form" is enabled.
This is where you define the number of press sheets
that will be created with the plate template.

Placement rule for perfecting
Placing Mode
This is where you can change the rule for generating
the back sheet (perfecting).
0
Single-sided
This is what you have when the front consists of
single plates and no plates will be created for the
back.
0
Work-and-turn
This is what you have when the front and back are
on one plate. As a result, you do not need a plate
for the back. The stack of paper is turned after
printing and printing is now on the reverse side.
The operator doesn't need to load a new plate.
Explanation of "Work-and-turn": The stack is
turned from right to left after printing. The side
that is not yet printed is printed now.
0
Work-and-tumble
See "Work-and-turn", the stack of paper, however,
is tumbled after printing.
Explanation of "Work-and-tumble": The stack is
turned from front to back after printing. The side
that is not yet printed is printed now.
0
Perfecting
Two plates are created for printing, one for the
front and one for the back. The stack is turned
from front to back after printing the front. A per-
fector in the press very often does this.

0
Sheetwise (front and back)
Two plates are created for printing, one for the
front and one for the back. The stack is turned
from right to left after printing the front.
Note: For the "Sheetwise" mode (work-and-turn as
2 well), the subject is always placed on the plate
beyond/above the gripper margin. The minimum
space between subject and gripper margin is
equivalent to the page trim of the left master
page. For the "Perfector" mode (work-and-tumble
as well), the subject is centered horizontally and
vertically on the plate. If you want centering for
"Sheetwise" as well, you must tick "Center subject"
in "Preferences > Defaults".
Separating Gap
Only active if "Work-and-tumble" or "Work-and-turn"
is selected
If several folding sheets are positioned on a press
sheet, you can push them apart by defining a separat-
ing gap in this box.
Paper Definition for Production

This shows the paper that may have been selected in
the Job Assistant and that you can change for the cur-
rent job.
In "File > Preferences > General", it is possible to make
the "Name" section editable. See Paper Name Editable,
The paper thickness affects creeping, see also Creep-
ing and Bottling, page 936.

You can assign the job a paper type or create one for
it by displaying the "Choose Paper" dialog using the
folder button to the right. You can also do the same
for the paper size.
You can also create or modify papers and paper sizes
in the "Jobs & Resources > Resources & Machines"
menu in "Papers" or "Page and Paper Sizes". See also
Page and Paper Sizes, page 712.
Multiple Web Widths

Prerequisite: "Show check items for cover bonding
and glue line" must be enabled in "File > Preferences >
General".
Only makes sense to use this in web printing.
You can define the width of each roll (list box beside
it) if you have multiple webs.
Center offset
Prerequisite: "Show check items for cover bonding
and glue line" must be enabled in "File > Preferences >
General".
See Paper Center Offset, page 986 for details.
Subject Position on Paper

AutoPosition Subject
The lower edge of the subject with the bleed size is
positioned on the lead edge (blue line).
You can change the subject position manually if the
option is disabled.
Center Subject
The subject is centered in vertical (Y) direction.

Schemes
The tab is only enabled in the "Imposition" and "Auto-
This is where you check, modify and create all the
folding sheets for the current product part. Besides
selecting the folding scheme, you can modify gaps,
assign special master pages, use the bottling func-
tion, organize your press sheet, edit gang run forms
and create folding sheet groups.
Page Assignment & Master Schemes (only for the "Imposition" mode)
Placeable Pages
This refers to the number of pages specified for the
product part that are to be placed on the selected
folding sheets. You cannot change the number of
pages in this box. You define the number of pages in
the "Definition, page 918" tab, "Imposition" mode.
Unplaced Pages
This shows the number of pages that still are not
placed on the folding sheets created so far. In certain
cases, negative values are shown in this box, for
example, if the page total was reduced at a later point
and there are now more folding sheets than required.
If you increased the number of pages, you can match
the number of folding sheets accordingly in "Num-
ber" in the table.
The product part is ready when the number of
unplaced pages is zero.

List of Used Schemes

This list shows the schemes selected for the product
part with the number of placed folding sheets and
assigned plates.
Using the buttons on the right, you can load or
replace schemes to the product part or remove them
from there or single out folding sheets:
Folder button
Click the folder button and select a created scheme in
the "Choose scheme" dialog that then appears. It is
linked to the plate template selected in "Printing
Plate", and the press sheet with folding sheet displays
in the graphic window.
To replace a scheme (button)

Click this button and then replace the scheme
selected in the list by another one.
Note: The list only shows schemes with the same
2 number of rows and columns as the one you want to
replace. You can disable this filter function in the
selection dialog.
To single out a folding sheet (button)

You can also trigger this function using the context-
sensitive menu in the scheme list in "Press Sheet". See
Printing Plate, page 955 for a description.
Trashcan (button)
You can delete the scheme selected in the list and all
of its folding sheets from the product part by clicking
the trashcan icon.

Editing Schemes in the List

This is where you can check and change the currently
displayed folding schemes and their folding sheets.
Scheme Name
Displays the scheme name. You cannot edit the name.
Number
This shows the number of folding sheets that the
selected scheme created. You can change this num-
ber, for example, to match page numbers that were
changed. Double-click the box below "Number" and
type in the new value.
Printing Plate
Display of the plate template that is linked or will be
linked to the selected folding scheme.
Select "Singularize Folding Sheets" (either with the
button on the right or in the context-sensitive menu)
if a folding scheme is to be placed on a different press
sheet (gang run form). A press sheet is not linked to
the folding scheme. Later you can place the folding
scheme on the "correct" press sheet.
Active Inspector Section

You can choose from the following four options in
the "Active Inspector Section" list box:
Gaps and Master Pages

The selected folding scheme displays when you select
this option. You now can:

0
Click "Automatic Gaps" to calculate the gaps from
the paper and folding sheet size so that the fold-
ing sheets and the paper have the same size.
This takes into account the set binding method:
0
Saddlestitching and Mixed Binding: Gaps
between two-page spreads are set to 0 mm.
0
No Rule: Gaps are set evenly.
0
Other: Gaps between two-page spreads are set
to the maximum routing margin, unless the
routing margin is to be ignored during calcula-
tion. In this case, the inner gaps are set to 0.
0
Change the gaps shown for head, foot and back
margins.
0
Assign special master pages
You will see the "Special master pages.." button if
you created a special master page, either in the
Product Part Inspector > "Master Pages" tab or in
the Job Assistant. Click this button to open the
"Assign master pages from list" dialog. Now select
a row in the "Assigned master page" column. A list
box displays where you can select the master page
and assign it to the page. The page then has a
green page number.
You can also assign different special master pages
to the front and back in this dialog. This is
required, for example, if the contents have differ-
ent positions. Changes to a master page on the
front means that changes are automatically made
on the back. You can still modify this change if
you wish.
or:

Click a page in the scheme display to assign a mas-

ter page to this page with the Context-sensitive
menu, page 213. The page then also has a green
page number.
This requires that "several" is set in "Types" in the
"Master Pages" tab.
All Folding Sheets

The selected folding scheme displays as a table and as
an animated graphic when you select this option.
0
Folding Sheet
The number of folding sheets in the product part
is shown after "Group Size". All the folding sheets
incl. the pages placed on them are shown in a
table if you open the "Group Size" folder by click-
ing the folder icon or with a double click.
Select at least one row to be able to create a new
group or move the folding sheets using the respec-
tive function in the context-sensitive menu:
0
Create Group
You can only create a new group if you selected
"Mixed Binding" in the Product Part Inspector >
"Binding" tab.
Mixed binding includes perfect binding and
saddlestitching. The sheets in a group are sad-
dlestitched and gathered and glued before they
are bound together with the other groups, for
example, by thread-stitching. The creeping val-
ues are calculated separately for each group.
A new group will have as many sheets as you
selected, ignoring any group name.

0
Move Folding Sheets
You can use this option to move sheets to the
position you want in the book block.
(Index is the number in No.)
0
Sort Folding Sheet for Bookbinding
Bookbinders generally want that smaller fold-
ing sheets (half sheets, quarter sheets or even
light-weight sheets) are not at the end of a book
block. This function automatically repositions
the sheets accordingly.
0
No.
Shows the new position of the folding sheet,
defined by the index (context-sensitive menu:
"Move Folding Sheet").
Example:
You have four folding sheets. Folding sheet num-
ber 4 is given a new index, 1. Folding sheets 4 and
1 swap accordingly.
0
Scheme (Press Sheet)
The folding scheme name of the press sheet is
shown in this box.
0
Group
Displays which group the sheet is part of.
Bottling
This function is especially interesting for very large
sheets that will be folded several times with a cross
fold. The "Bottling" function counterbalances a page
rotation caused by a cross fold.

This slight rotation prevents wrong orientation of the

pages that can occur during folding because of the
large amount of material in the back margin.
When several pages of a large signature are folded
into each other, the vertical alignment of the pages in
the bound publication is no longer exact. The pages
look slightly rotated outward or inward. With the
"Bottling" function, you can specify a slight rotation
in the opposite direction so that the pages are exactly
aligned vertically when folded later.
The schematic diagram below illustrates how the
angles are determined for "Bottling". The red dots are
pivot points that are clicked and from which rotation
is calculated.
Bottling
Rotation of the pages
that can occur during
folding because of the
large amount of mate-
rial in the back margin
Correction with "Bot-
tling"
Pivot points
You will find a description of how to proceed in "Bot-

tling" in the Product Part Inspector in "Schemes". Set
"Active Inspector Section" to "Bottling".

You can see the currently selected plate template

with the set turning type (Sheetwise or Perfector) in
the list below "Printing Plate" above the bottling edi-
tor. Refer also to section Printing Plate, page 955.
Bottling editor
At the top of the bottling editor, you will see informa-
tion about the direction of rotation when you enter a
positive or negative angle.
You can enter angles for all the pages in the text box
below. The angle you enter is applied directly to the
page and the page is shown rotated in the graphic
window in the "Press Sheet" tab.
The direction in which a page will be rotated depends
on the type of folding and the position of the page in
the scheme. In the scheme display, you can therefore
determine the pivot point and the angle for each
page.
You determine the point around which the page will
be rotated by clicking the dot at the corner concerned
of the stylized page. The red dot becomes active. You
can enter the angle of rotation in the corresponding
text box for the page.

The settings are only made for the front signature. If

a back signature exists, the settings are automatically
transferred to this signature.
Press Sheet Layout

The following functions are available for the selected
folding scheme when you select this option:
Exception:
You can use the functions marked by "gang run form
only" if the "Gang run form" option was enabled in
the "Plates" tab. The defined gang run form is marked
by the sign "#" in Prinect Signa Station in "List of
Selected Plates".
Fold Lay Mark Position (related to paper)

Folding sheets are positioned at the fold lay mark you
want with this automatic function. The fold lay mark
is marked by a bracket in the graphic window.
The folding sheets are positioned so that they are
always at the lower paper edge in keeping with the
fold lay mark. You can set the fold lay mark to be
"Centered" (pointing to the center of the paper), "Left"
or "Right" (pointing to the respective corner of the
paper).
Position and orientation of folding sheet 1up (gang run

form only)
AutoArrange
This function centers the folding sheets on the press
sheets if there is enough room. See also the Auto-
matic rotation, page 962 option.

Folding Sheet Copies Allowed

This option allows folding sheets to be duplicated
automatically on the plate as long as there is enough
space.
The option applies to the scheme selected in the
scheme list and by default is selected.
No copies of the selected folding sheet are generated
if the option is disabled for a scheme. However, you
can position a different folding sheet on the plate.
Automatic rotation
Used together with the "AutoArrange" function, this
option allows folding sheets to be rotated for optimal
utilization of the press sheet.
One Folding Sheet per Sheet

This option gives you more flexible handling when
generating press sheets. When this option is enabled,
you can only place folding sheets with the same num-
ber on a press sheet (copies). This is helpful, for exam-
ple when publishing books where, for technical rea-
sons (color, etc) one single sheet in the folding sheet
list has to be shifted. See also Move Folding Sheets,
page 958.
If several folding sheets are on a press sheet, they are
all shifted when you insert one because the whole
press sheet must not be changed and shifts as well as
a result. The "One Folding Sheet per Sheet" option pre-
vents folding sheets with different numbers from
being placed on one press sheet. In this way, you have
that only one folding sheet is shifted.

With Gripper Margin

Includes the gripper margin when the number of
1ups is calculated automatically.
Number Folding Sheets (gang run form only)

Defines how many folding sheets of the same kind
will be placed on the press sheet.
List box (1up, 2up, 4up, 8up) (gang run form only)
The folding sheet 1ups are increased by the number
you select. 1up is set by default.
Edit Table (gang run form only)

You can change the positions of the folding sheets
manually in X and Y direction. You can change the
orientation of the folding sheets clockwise by 90 in a
list box. Use the "swapped" option to position folding
sheets from the front to the back and back again.
Folder Button
Lets you load a resource from the "Plate Layout" sec-
tion.

Graphic
Each colored element marks a folding sheet.

The red line refers to the fold lay mark.
The yellow folding sheet indicates that the front of
the folding sheet is on the front of the press sheet.
The green folding sheet indicates that the back of the
folding sheet is on the front of the press sheet.
Input box(es)
You can define free spaces between the folding sheets.
Folding sheets rotated (button)

This function is required if you wish to change the
orientation between several folding sheets. The fold
lay marks are rotated by 180 when you click this but-
ton.
Swap front / back (button)

In practice, you generally want to use the separating
line as the lay mark for the folder if you have more
than one folding sheet. This is only possible if you can

place normal folding sheets together with folding

sheets with swapped front and back on one press
sheet.
Auto (list box)

The "Auto" list box controls the order of the folding
sheets on the press sheet.
The first folding sheet is always at the bottom left in
an automatic arrangement.
To change the order to suit your needs, you must
define all the list boxes correctly (no number twice,
no "Auto").
Packaging
The tab is only enabled in the "Packaging" working
mode.
See Packaging, page 131 for details.

Folding Sheet Inspector
Attributes
You can:
0 Change the position of the folding sheet on the
press sheet.
0 Change the head, foot and back margins using the
miniature scheme display.
0
Apply the changes made here to all sheets of the
same type.
Folding Sheet Data
Folding Sheet Name

This displays the folding sheet that is selected in the
Browser window or in the graphic view. Details about
the last folding sheet selected are shown if you
haven't selected a folding sheet.
Position X/Y
This shows the position of the selected folding sheet
on the press sheet. The bottom left corner of the
paper is the zero point for both directions.
You can change the values for these positions manu-
ally.
Sheet Width/Height
Size of the folding sheet, based on the page size and
gaps.

Scheme display
You can:
0
Change the head, foot and back margins, see also
Product Part Inspector > "Master Pages" tab > Trim
Allowance for Pages, page 929.
You can also change these data in the Product Part
Inspector, page 917, Schemes tab, Gaps and Master
Pages, page 955.
Apply to folding sheets of same kind

Click this button if you wish to apply all the inputs/
changes you made to all other folding sheets of the
same type in the product part.
Marks
The "Marks" tab is the same in all the inspectors that
deal with marks. Make sure that the mark you have
set displays in its proper inspector.
This is where you can position any marks for the
selected folding sheet/assembly block. You can also
set cut marks, folding marks, folding crosses, folding
sheet cuts and collating marks in this dialog. The
width and height of the mark are shown in the
"Expert Mode". In addition, you can define the clip-
ping region of a mark (part that will be imaged) and/
or imaging in the background. You can apply all the
changes you made in this dialog to all surfaces and
folding sheets of the same type in the product part.
You can find more details about marks in the User's
Guide.

Marks List
Surfaces
This is where you can select which marks will be
listed:
For sheetfed offset such as "All Surfaces (front and
back) or only for front or only for back
or:
For web offset such as "Top" and "Bottom" for web 1,
web 2, web 3 or web 4
You can add or remove table columns (bold headings)
with "Select Columns" in the context-sensitive menu.
You can select columns in the "Customize List View"
dialog than then displays and click the button you
want. By defining the order in "View Fields", you
define the column positions in the list from left to
right. The column setup is saved in Prinect Signa Sta-
tion and is available for all jobs.
The list can have the following columns that can be
hidden if the inspectors window is not opened wide
enough. The scroll bar displays in this case.
No. Order in the list.

Icon The mark icon is displayed.
Name The mark name is displayed.
Reference Point This column displays the reference point for the
mark.
Hotspot Position of the hotspot in the mark (important for
the mark to snap to position in relation to the ref-
erence point).

Hotspot XY Coordinates of the hotspot position in the mark.

Layer Shows whether the mark is set in the foreground
or background of the page content.
Absolute Offset Coordinates of the distance to the bottom left cor-
ner of the object for which a mark is set, for exam-
ple, in the Folding Sheet Inspector for the folding
sheet, in the Press Sheet Inspector for the paper,
plate or subject.
Margin The part of the mark that is cut off is displayed as
is shown later in "Clippath" in the inspectors win-
dow.
Color This column displays the separation on which the
mark will be printed.
Mark Type Shows the mark type as was selected in the prefer-
ences or in the Marks Editor.
Surface (only Folding This column displays the surface on which the
Sheet/Assembly Block mark is located:
Inspector and Press Sheet For sheetfed offset: Single-sided, all surfaces, front
Inspector) or back
For web offset: "Top" and "Bottom" for web 1, web
2, web 3 or web 4
Parent (only Press Sheet This shows whether the mark refers to the paper,
Inspector) plate or subject.
Except for the last two rows, you can select the other
rows in the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector,
Press Sheet Inspector and Page/1up Inspector.

The folding and collating marks are the only auto-

matically set marks that are shown in the list. The
automatically set cut marks refer to the page/1up and
are listed in the Page/1up Inspector > "Marks" tab (a
page must be selected in the graphic window).
All the marks are displayed, irrespective of type and
reference, in the graphic view in the "Folding Sheet/
Assembly Block" tab. For more details about setting
marks, see Marks Resources, page 979.
The "Selected Mark" and "Expert Mode" sections are
enabled when you select one or more marks in the
list. These sections then show the data for the mark
selected. In multiple selection, the data of the first
mark selected are displayed. The selected mark is
highlighted by an orange square in the graphic view
in the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab.
You can also change the order of the marks by click-
ing a mark in the Context-sensitive menu, page 213.
It may be a good idea to change the order in some sit-
uations because the mark listed first is the last one to
be imaged and hides other marks below it.
Click the folder button on the right and add a mark
from the resources in the "Choose Mark" dialog that
then appears. You can also add marks by dragging
and dropping them from the marks resources in the
Browser window to the list. When you add marks,
they are shown in the list and in the graphic view
because they were set in relation to the folding sheet/
assembly block. Marks added in this way always have
"X=0/Y=0" as a reference point or "Lower left" in the
other inspectors.
Note: Tiling marks always refer to the paper. For that
2 reason, you can only set tiling marks with the Plate
Template Editor or the Press Sheet Inspector.

You can apply the selected mark(s) and its data to all
surfaces (front or back) in the product part by clicking
the icon below.
You can copy all marks on the front to the back by

clicking the icon below (only in the Press Sheet
Inspector and Folding Sheet Inspector).
You can replace the selected mark(s) by a new one

that you will select by clicking the icon below.
You can edit the selected mark with the relevant edi-
tor by clicking the icon below.
You can delete the selected mark(s) from the list by

clicking the trashcan icon.
You can create or change marks as well using the con-
text-sensitive menu in the Browser window in
"Marks" in the "Internal Resources" tab or in the
"Marks Resources" tab in the Folding Sheet/Assembly
Block Inspector, Press Sheet Inspector or Page/1up
Inspector.

Cut Marks - Folding Marks - Collating Mark - Folding

Crosses - Folding Sheet Cuts
The marks are automatically set for the folding sheet
if you enable one of these options. They are removed
if you disable the option. You can see which marks
are set or removed in the "Marks List" and in the
graphic window.
Cut marks (page-related) that you set or remove are
shown and hidden respectively in the "Page Inspector
> Marks".
Click the "Apply to folding sheets of same kind" but-
ton if the product part has other folding sheets that
are to be changed.
Note: A mark type must be set again if you change the
2 default for this mark type in the preferences for a par-
ticular job. You must do this so that the new mark dis-
plays in the graphic view, is added as an internal
mark of the job and displays in the Browser window.
Selected Mark
The following parameters of a mark selected in the
list are enabled and some of them can be changed if
needed:
Group/Name
This displays the resources group and the name of the
selected mark. The resources group and the name of
the first selected mark are shown if you selected sev-
eral marks.
Color
This is where you can select which separation will be
printed with the mark.

In addition, you can now set a mark on several color

layers. You can define color layers as knockout:
In the Press Sheet Inspector, Folding Sheet Inspector

and Page/1up Inspector, you can set a line mark and/
or text mark to "Dark Color" in the "Colors" tab. As a
result of this setting, this mark is always set automat-
ically to the darkest separation of the job. If a job is
output without black, a sheet lay mark, for example,
would automatically be set to the darkest color in the
job and output.
Note:
Like in a non-separated job, "black" becomes the dark-
est color in a separated job with a black separation.
The mark is set to the placeholder X only if there are

spot colors in the job. In this case, you can select the
darkest spot color manually in the "Colors" tab in the
Job Inspector.
Reference Point
This option lets you select one of the reference points
available for the selected mark. The bottom left cor-
ner of the folding sheet is the reference point, either
"Lower left" or "x=0/y=0". Starting there, you move in
single steps to the right (x direction) and/or to the top
(y direction) like in an axis system.
In the Folding Sheet Inspector, the reference points
have digits, e.g. "x=1/y=1" because every folding line in
the scheme can be a reference point. In the Press
Sheet and Page/1up Inspectors, words are used, e.g.
"Lower middle".

Examples:
Upper left Upper middle Upper right
Middle left Middle Middle right

middle
Reference point
Lower left Lower middle Lower right
Reference point

Position X/Y
This option lets you position the selected mark as you
want it in x/y direction in relation to its assigned ref-
erence point. The selected reference point can be, for
example, x=1/y=0.
0
"Change" button
When this button is enabled, the offset values are
modified/shown in relation to the last position of
the selected mark. The offset values are modified/
shown in relation to the reference point as
described above when the button is disabled.
This function is also suited for multiple selection.
Scaling / orientation
You can scale the selected mark up or down and
rotate it by the degrees specified. With orientation,
the mark is rotated counterclockwise around the
hotspot of the mark.
0 "Proportions" button
When the button is enabled, the proportions are
kept when you scale a mark.

Expert Mode
In this section, you can select whether the selected
mark will be printed in the foreground or back-
ground of the page content.
The width and height of the selected mark is also
specified. This value is defined by its scale and can
now also be changed.
Clippath
This option lets you cut off a part of the selected
mark, for example, to print only a part of a color con-
trol bar. The value entered is cut off from the original
size like a margin on the top, bottom, left or right.
The original size of the mark, however, doesn't
change. Values for left and right can already be avail-
able for the color control bar if the bar was already
matched to the subject.

0
Measurement tool button
You can define a clipping region for a mark in the

graphic view after you click this button:
1. Select the mark in the list or double-click it in the
graphic view.
2. You should zoom up the mark in the graphic view
(approx. 200%).
3. Using the command + Shift keys and holding down
the mouse button, you can now create a rectangular
box within the mark (orange frame).
4. The measurement tool button is enabled when you

release the mouse button and then the two keys.
5. Click the button to add the values to the boxes on the
left.
Apply to folding sheets of same kind

changes you made in the "Marks" tab to all other fold-
ing sheets of the same type in the product part.

Marks Resources
Apart from the "Internal Resources", the "Marks
Resources" tab is identical to that in "Jobs & Resources
> Marks" and is used to position marks to an active job
by dragging-and-dropping them there.
You will also find the "Marks Resources" tab in the
Press Sheet Inspector, Page/1up Inspector, Assembly
Block Inspector and Plate Template Editor. Drag-and-
drop works always the same way, what matters is
from which inspector the marks come from.
The reference is also highlighted according to the
type of mark (related to press sheet, folding sheet or
page).
The following constellations are possible:
In the Press Sheet Inspector, you can select a mark
and drag-and-drop it from there to the graphic win-
dow to the "Press Sheet", "Folding Sheet/Assembly
Block" and "Press Sheet List" tabs. You will see the pos-
sible reference points if you move a mark to the
graphic window holding down the mouse button.
The marks are always positioned on the press sheet
and appear in the "Marks" tab in the Press Sheet
Inspector.
In the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector, you
can drag-and-drop a mark from there to the graphic
window to the "Press Sheet", "Folding Sheet/Assembly
Block" and "Press Sheet List" tabs. You will see the pos-
sible reference points and the highlighted selected
folding sheet/assembly block if you move a mark to
the graphic window holding down the mouse button.
The marks are always positioned on the folding sheet/
assembly block and appear in the "Marks" tab in the
Folding Sheet Inspector.

In the Page/1up Inspector, you can drag-and-drop a

mark from there to the graphic window to the "Press
Sheet", "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" and "Press
Sheet List" tabs. You will see the possible reference
points and the highlighted selected page if you move
a mark to the graphic window holding down the
mouse button. The marks are always positioned on
the page/1up and appear in the "Marks" tab in the
Page/1up Inspector.
Note:
2 0
CoverClippath marks are page-related marks and,
for that reason, can only be set with the Page/1up
Inspector.
0
Tiling marks are paper-related marks and, for that
reason, can only be set with the Plate Template
Editor or the Press Sheet Inspector.
Assembly Block Inspector

The Assembly Block Inspector is designed to edit jobs
you created in the "Montage" working mode.
It's now possible for you to load a single 1up of a CFF2
file so that you can create a custom layout and not
base your work on default cutting dies.. In this case,
you can work in the Montage mode and in the Pack-
aging mode. This requires that the "Packaging" option
is enabled. See Packaging, page 131 for details.
You must edit jobs that were created with the "Sheet
Optimization" option in the Press Sheet Inspector. See
Sheet Optimization, page 141 for details.

Attributes
Assembly Block Parameters
Block name
This box displays the block name that was assigned in
the Job Assistant and is selected in the Browser win-
dow or in the graphic view. You can enter a prefix for
all the block names if you haven't selected a block
name. You can change the name afterwards.
You can create a new assembly block by clicking the
icon below.
Click the folder button below to load a CFF2 file for

creating a new assembly block with a CAD single 1up.
You can then duplicate and arrange the 1up as you
want. You can edit the clip path in the "Folding Sheet/
Assembly Block" tab in the graphic window. See Pack-
aging, page 131 for details.
The option is only available if the "Packaging" option
is enabled.
You can delete the assembly block from the list by

Same Content for All 1ups

When this option is set (default), all the 1ups are
assigned the same content. In the graphic window,
you will see that all the 1ups have the same number.
The 1ups of the first assembly block are all numbered

"1", those of the second assembly block "2", etc. When

you assign a content to a 1up to an assembly block, all
the 1ups in this assembly block are automatically
given the same content.
The 1ups are numbered consecutively, starting with
one ('1'), if the option is not set. In this case, you must
assign the contents separately for each 1up.
Copies X/Y
In these boxes, you can define how often a 1up in the
assembly block will be created in X (horizontal) or Y
(vertical) direction.
Fill Sheet
Starting from the present position of the assembly
block on the press sheet, as many 1ups as will fit on
the press sheet will be created to the right, left and/or
on top.
Gaps X/Y
If an assembly block has several 1ups, you can specify
the gaps between the 1ups in X and Y direction.
Position X/Y
This shows the position of the selected assembly
block on the press sheet. The bottom left corner of
the paper is the zero point for both directions.
Margin, left / right / top / bottom

You can enter a margin for the assembly block in
these boxes. A cut mark is not placed if this margin is
smaller than the cut mark. This allows the cut point
for assembly blocks to be set accurately without the
automatically set cut marks disturbing this setting.

1up Definition
Width/Height
The size of the 1up is specified.
Bleed
The bleed width is shown. Prinect Signa Station
makes sure automatically that bleeds do not overlap
in an assembly bock.
Name
You can rename the 1up selected in the graphic win-
dow, for example, one in a gang run form. The differ-
ent names help you keep track of your work better if
you have different 1ups. The changed name is taken
into account in the JDF workflow.
Custom Bleed Values

Enable "Use custom values".
You can define a custom bleed for all the pages of the
selected 1up.
Orientation
You can rotate the 1ups on the selected assembly
block by the specified degrees with this option.
Special angle
Click "On". You can then enter an angle by which the
1ups on the selected assembly block will be rotated.
Pivot is bottom left. This is used for envelopes, for
example, to align the rear flap of the envelope cor-
rectly (35).

Placement rule for assigned 1ups

You can find a description of this in the Placement
rule for assigned pages, page 930.
Lenticular Printing Settings

In lenticular printing, a lens foil and a specially
edited 1up (image) are needed for impositioning. The
lens foil is printed from the back and consists of par-
allel lenses (curvature of the foil). In addition, you
have to set other conditions for assembly:
Lenticular Scaling
Different lenticular effects need either a horizontal
or vertical orientation of the lens.
Mechanical Pitch (resolution of the foil)

Describes the resolution of the foil.
Image Scale
Matches the image to the recorder resolution.
Marks
You can find a description of this in the Marks,
page 967.
Difference to above description: In contrast to the
Folding Sheet Inspector, you can only change the
automatically set cut marks in the Assembly Block
Inspector but not the folding marks, collating mark,
folding crosses and folding sheet cuts.
You can now already assign automatic cut marks to a
color layer with the Job Assistant.

Marks Resources
You can find a description of this in the Marks
Resources, page 979.
Press Sheet Inspector
Press Sheet
Management Data
Sheet Name
This displays the name of the press sheet that is
selected in the Browser window or in the graphic
view. A name change is also shown in the product
part (Browser window). The system checks whether
the job name is unique. A message displays if a name
was assigned twice. A unique name is important for
finishing, e.g. for tiled sheets.
Note: A change in the sheet name is also reflected in
2 the internal sheet name, e.g. in the .cip file for finish-
ing (0001#Sheet 1 #A__Name).
Plate Width / Height

The size of the plate is shown. You can also see these
data in the Product Part Inspector > "Plates" tab.
Centering
The entire subject (not the single folding sheet) is cen-
tered automatically either horizontally, vertically or
in both directions on the press sheet.

Sheet Optimization (only in the "Montage" working mode)

This section is only active when jobs are open with
the "Sheet Optimization" option enabled.
You can find a description of "Sheet Optimization" in
the section Sheet Optimization, page 141.
Press Sheet Parameters
Used Colors
Number of colors/separations that will be printed on
the press sheet. This information only displays if data
pages are assigned to the job/product part.
Plate template
Display of the plate template name that was entered
in the Product Part Inspector > "Plates" tab or in the
Job Assistant.
Papers
This shows the paper that was selected in the Job
Assistant or in the Product Part Inspector > "Plates"
tab and that you can change for the current job.
Paper Width / Paper Height

These boxes display the paper width / paper height
that you can change if required.
Paper Center Offset

The offset in this case is different to the center offset
of the folding scheme. In this case, it is the offset of
the paper from the middle of the press sheet (horizon-
tal) (see also X offset in the Plate Template Editor).

Normally, the value is '0', and the paper lies at the

middle of the press sheet along the horizontal axis.
You can enter a horizontal offset in this box if the
normal case is not correct for printing reasons. Posi-
tive values shift to the right, negative values to the
left. The reverse side is matched automatically.
Baseline
Display and, if necessary, correction of the distance of
the paper from the leading edge of the plate. Positive
values move the paper away from the plate edge, i.e.
to the top, negative values move the paper down.
Folding Sheet/Assembly Block List

All the folding sheets/assembly blocks on the press
sheet are listed. Details about a sheet/block are
enabled when you select the sheet/block.
Name
This displays the folding sheet/assembly block that is
selected in the list.
Position X/Y
This shows the position of the selected folding sheet/
assembly block on the press sheet. The bottom left
corner of the paper is the zero point for both direc-
tions.
Orientation
You can rotate the folding sheet/assembly block with
this option.

Version Preallocated for Versioned Output (Versioning Only)

This section is only active if a number greater than '1'
was entered in "Job Inspector > Versions", enabling as
a result the new versioning.
Mark a folding sheet in the "Folding Sheet/Assembly
Block List". You can then assign a version to it and add
or remove layers.
Assign Versions
A new editor for "assigning versions to folding sheets"
has been added.
You can use this editor for multiple selection of fold-
ing sheets that you can then assign to a version.
You will find a description of the new versioning and
the editor in the User's Guide.
Apply to press sheets of same kind

changes you made in the "Press Sheet" tab to all other
press sheets of the same type in the product part.
The function is available only in the "Imposition" and
"Automatic Imposition" working modes.
Marks
This parameter lets you position any marks in rela-
tion to the paper, plate or subject (bounding box
around printed area on the sheet). The width and
height of the mark are shown in the "Expert Mode". In
addition, you can define the clipping region of a
mark (part that will be imaged) and/or imaging in the
background. You can apply all the changes you made
in this dialog to all surfaces and press sheets of the
same type in the product part.

You can find more details about marks in the User's

Guide.
Marks List
Surfaces
This is where you can select whether the marks will
be listed or not:
For sheetfed offset such as "All Surfaces (front and
back) or only for front or only for back
or:
For web offset such as "Top" and "Bottom" for web 1,
web 2, web 3 or web 4
See the Marks List, page 968 for a description of the
list.
The list only shows marks that refer to the paper,
plate or subject (bounding box around printed area
on the sheet). The automatically set cut marks, fold-
ing marks and collating mark refer to the page/1up or
the folding sheet and are not displayed in this list but
only in the list in their respective inspectors. For
more details about setting marks, see Marks
enabled when you select a mark in the list. These sec-
tions then show the data for the mark selected. The
selected mark is highlighted by an orange square in
the graphic view in the > "Press Sheet" tab.
ing a mark in the Context-sensitive menu.


Browser window to the list. The marks are set refer-
ring to what you selected, "Paper" "Plate" or "Subject".
You can of course change this reference.
You can delete the selected mark from the list by
You can apply the selected mark(s) and its data to all
surfaces in the product part by clicking the icon
below.

"Marks" in the "Resources" tab or in the "Marks
Resources" tab in the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block
Inspector, Press Sheet Inspector or Page/1up Inspec-
tor.
Selected Mark
See Selected Mark, page 972 for a description.
In addition to the above description, you can also
select:
Parent: Paper / Plate / Subject

You can assign a mark that refers to the paper, plate
or subject (bounding box around printed area on the
sheet), for example, a sheet lay mark for the paper, an
ink pickup mark in web offset (random dot) for the
plate and a color control bar for the subject.

Expert Mode
See Expert Mode, page 977 for a description.
Apply to press sheets of same kind

changes you made in the "Press Sheet" tab to all other
press sheets of the same type in the product part.
Marks Resources
Page/1up Inspector
Attributes
Trimmed Format
This shows the current trimmed size of the selected
page or 1up. You cannot change this data.
Position X/Y
The position of the selected page refers to the bottom
left corner of the folding sheet.
Width/Height
In folding sheets, the values are the same as the data
of the master page, in assembly blocks as the data of
the 1up definition. They show the trimmed size.
Orientation
The setting is taken from the defined master page or
from the 1up definition.

Active Layer
This is where you can select a layer to be able to make
a change to it. The selected layer is shown in the
graphic view. You can create the layers for the prod-
uct part in the Job Inspector > "Administrative Data"
tab or in the Job Assistant. A maximum of 12 layers
can be used.
You will find more details about working with several
layers in Number of Layers, page 99 or View Proper-
ties and Enable/Disable Layers, page 827.
Version Preallocated for Versioned Output
Active version
You set the active version in the "Press Sheet Inspec-
tor" in "Version Preallocated for Versioned Output".
In the active version, you can assign or remove indi-
vidual layer contents to or from a page marked in the
graphic window with the "Include/Exclude Layers"
list box.
You will find a description of the new versioning in
the User's Guide.
Bleed
This box displays the value for the selected page, and
you can change it if required. Generally, you don't
need to change this value because it was calculated
correctly on the basis of the master page. Positive val-
ues move the trim away from the page, negative val-
ues move it in towards the page.
The bleed specified in the master pages refers to all
the pages in the product part (see also Product Part
Inspector > Master Pages, page 923).

All pages/1ups with same index

The changes you made to a page/1up are applied to all
other pages/1ups with the same page number or con-
tent (1up).
Include back
You can confine your changes just to the front if you
disable this function.
Clip path
Can only be used in the "Packaging" mode.
More details can be found in the "Packaging" chapter,
1up Inspector, page 135.
Placement rule for assigned page/1up

You can find a description of this in the Placement
rule for assigned pages, page 930.
Additional functions for the Page/1up Inspector

0
Measurement tool button
The Page/1up Inspector has a "Measurement tool"
button on the right besides the text boxes for "Off-
set X/Y" in the "By user (view options) > Offset >
Custom" option.
This tool lets you define an exact visual offset for a

selected page/1up in the graphic window > "Fold-
ing Sheet/Assembly Block" tab.

0
Click the selected page/1up you wish to move
while holding down the command + Shift keys.
0
Holding down the mouse button, now create a
square that defines the offset in X and Y direc-
tion (the opposite edge defines the new posi-
tion).
0
The measurement tool button is enabled when
you release the mouse button and then the two
keys.
0
Now click the button to apply the data of the
square you created to the boxes and trigger the
offset.
Only one page may be selected with this function.
Note: This function is a very useful one especially
2 incutting
the packaging mode to match the 1up to the
die. In the punch outline of the 1up, select
a certain feature (e.g. intersection of two lines) and
use the measurement tool on the corresponding
feature of the CFF2 outline (magenta-colored line).
The 1up is positioned exactly to the CFF2 punch
outline if you follow the procedure described
above.
0
Offset/scaling with the arrow keys
You can use offset or scaling accurately, with
visual control in the graphic window, when you
click the offset or scaling box with the mouse but-
ton and then use the arrow keys. Offset/scaling
goes in the opposite direction if you hold down
the Alt key at the same time.
0
Scaling / orientation
Scaling and orientation of the contents are only
applied to the scheme and not to the document.
An advantage of this is that when you assign a new

document to the scheme the pages are loaded to

the scheme with defined settings.
Creeping
On
The creeping values currently applicable for a page
are shown and a tick is set if creeping was enabled
when you created the product part, In some cases,
however, creeping must not be enabled (image runs
over back margin). You then disable this option by
removing the tick from the box (see also Creeping
and Bottling, page 936).
Scaled creeping
A tick is set and the creeping values are shown if
creeping and "Scaling" as the creeping mode were
enabled when you created the product part. You can
find more details about this subject in Creeping and
Bottling, page 936.
Apply Rule to All Pages

The settings you defined for the selected page are
applied to all pages in the product part.
Note: Remember the "Restrict 'Apply' functions in
2 Page Inspector" check box in "File > Preferences >
Defaults > Several Switches". You can restrict the func-
tion to the selected folding sheet/assembly block with
it.
Marks
This is where you can position any marks for the
selected page/1up. The width and height of the mark
are shown in the "Expert Mode". In addition, you can

define the clipping region of a mark (part that will be

imaged) and/or imaging in the background. You can
find more details about marks in the User's Guide.
Marks List
See the Marks List, page 968 for a description of the
list.
Automatically set cut marks that are shown in the
list. The automatically set folding and collating
marks refer to the folding sheet/assembly block and
are listed in the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspec-
tor > "Marks" tab. However, all the marks are dis-
played in the graphic view in the "Folding Sheet/
Assembly Block" tab. For more details about setting
marks, see Marks Resources, page 979.
enabled when you select a mark in the list. These sec-
tions then show the data for the mark selected. The
selected mark is highlighted by an orange square in
the graphic view in the "Folding Sheet/Assembly
Block" tab.
ing a mark in the Context-sensitive menu, page 213.
Browser window to the list. When you add folding
and collating marks, they are shown in the list and in
the graphic view because they were set in relation to
the page/1up.

You can delete the selected mark from the list by

"Marks" in the "Resources" tab or in the "Marks
Resources" tab in the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block
Inspector, Press Sheet Inspector or Page/1up Inspec-
tor.
Selected Mark
See Selected Mark, page 972 for a description.
In addition to the above description, you can also
select:
Expert Mode
See Expert Mode, page 977 for a description.
Apply changes
To all pages/1ups
changes you made in the "Marks" tab to all other
pages/1ups in the product part.
Note: Remember the "Restrict 'Apply' functions in
2 Page Inspector" check box in "File > Preferences >
Defaults > Several Switches". You can restrict the func-
tion to the selected folding sheet/assembly block with
it.
To pages/1ups with same index

Click this button if you wish to apply all the page/1up
inputs/changes you made in the "Marks" tab to all
other pages/1ups with the same page number or con-
tent (1up).

Examples:
In the "Imposition" mode, all pages numbered '1' are
changed if you have copies. All the copies of a 1up are
changed in the "Montage" mode.
To left / right pages

changes you made for a selected page (either left or
right) in the "Marks" tab to all other left or right
pages.
Marks Resources
Document Inspector
Document
This provides you with general information about the
document you have currently selected.
Properties
The properties of the selected PDF document are
shown. If your job has several PDF documents, then
information about the PDF selected in the Browser,
graphic or list window is shown. The information
comes from the layout application.
Note: Acrobat Distiller automatically starts if a Post-
2 Script document is to be processed with Prinect Signa
Station and converts it to a PDF document. You don't

have to remember any special settings in Acrobat Dis-

tiller because this is taken care of by the job options
in Prinect Signa Station.
You must enable the following options for your setup
in "Preferences > Adobe PDF Settings > Advanced" if
Acrobat Distiller runs on a different computer for the
conversion of a PostScript document to a PDF docu-
ment:
0
Process DSC Comments
0
Preserve Document Information from DSC
Available colors
The colors used in the entire document, including
spot colors, are shown in this list.
If you are working with separated PDF, you can
change the color names in the table by double-click-
ing the table item. The new name is then used in the
job.
Page
This provides you with information about the PDF
page you have currently selected. It is also possible for
you to modify or move the trim box of the PDF page.
Area of application
This parameter lets you define where the changes
will be applied if changes are made in "Trim box".
The default setting is "selected". The selected page and
PDF file are shown in the caption bar of the inspec-
tors window.

You can also select "even" where all even pages will be
changed, "odd" for changes to all odd pages and "all"
where all pages of the selected PDF file will be
changed.
If you select "all", each change to the trim box will be
applied at once and without confirmation to all the
pages/1ups in the PDF file. You can view the changes
right away in the "Press Sheet" tab in the graphic win-
dow.
Trimmed Size (Trim Box)
Selection
The list box shows the bounding boxes defined in the
PDF file. Only different sized boxes are shown.
The trim box always forms the basis.
If you select a larger media box, for example, this is
used as the basis for offsets. The selected media box
becomes the trim box.
The list box changes to "user-defined" if you change
the values below because changing them means that
they are inevitably different to those of the trim box.
Rel. position X/Y

This option lets you move the trim box relative to the
content of a PDF page. As a result, the motif can be in
a different position in the trim box. The bottom left
corner is the reference point.
This can be used in PDF page assignment if the follow-
ing setting was selected for the master page in the
"Product Part Inspector > Placement rule for assigned
pages/1ups":

0
"Automatic" mode or
0
"By user (view options)" mode with "From trim
box" offset.
A change in the size of the trim box (in the graphic
view > "Document" tab) does not affect positioning.
Only the position of the bottom left corner is impor-
tant.
0
Offset with the arrow keys
You can use offset accurately, with direct visual
control of X and Y direction in the graphic win-
dow, when you click the offset box with the mouse
cursor and then use the arrow keys. Offset goes in
the opposite direction if you hold down the Alt
key at the same time.
You will find a description of the bounding boxes (e.g.
trim box) in the section Bounding Boxes, page 37.
You can read how Prinect Signa Station evaluates the
bounding boxes in the PDF file in the
section Placement rule for assigned pages,
page 930.
Width/Height
The size data for the trim box is shown in these boxes.
Use the folder button to the right to access standard
trim box sizes in the resources at any time.
Scale X/Y
The PDF page is scaled during placement but this is
only advisable if the placement rule for assigned
pages is set to "Automatic" in the master page.

Orientation
The PDF page is rotated during placement but this is
only advisable if the placement rule for assigned
pages is set to "Automatic" in the master page.
Note: Scaling and orientation of the contents are only
2 applied to the document and not to the layout/
scheme as in the Page/1up Inspector. The advantage
of this, when working with the Prinect Prepress Man-
ager, for example, is that, if you want to use a differ-
ent scheme for the document, you only need to
replace the scheme without having to enter your data
again. You can assign the data described here to a PDF
page in the Prinect Prepress Manager as well. Prinect
Signa Station uses them and shows them in this
inspector.
Available colors
The colors used in the selected page, including spot
colors, are shown in this list.

ABC List Window
10 List Window
List Functionality
The list window shows you the contents of the cur-
rently selected job as a table.
The list window has five different tabs. All of these
tabs show you data as lists. You can also start many
different actions with the implemented Context-sen-
sitive menu, page 213.
If a job has several product parts, only the content of
the currently selected product part is shown in the
"Press Sheet", "Folding Sheet" and " Page List" tabs. The
"Assigned" and "Not assigned" tabs refer to the job and
show you data relating to the whole job.
The list window is a supplement to the Browser and
graphic window. It shows details about parameters
such as format, paper size, etc.
Like in the Browser window, you can also drag-and-
drop pages from this window to the graphic window
and position them in the open job.
You can decide on the parameters you want to show
in all the tabs of the list window. You can also show
and hide hierarchy levels and edit columns:
Context-sensitive Menu Functionality

1. Display the context-sensitive menu by clicking the
caption bar with the parameter names shown in bold:

List Window ABC
2. Click "Select Columns".

The table that now appears lets you configure the list
as you want it:
3. You can create your own column with the "Add Text
Mark" function. You can define the data that is to
appear in this column using custom text marks with
placeholders. See Attributes, page 916 for a descrip-
tion.

ABC List Window
You can view different parameters in each tab. You

can find more about which parameters you can view
in the various tabs in the descriptions below.
You can hide the list window permanently if you
want. If you want a bigger graphic window, deselect
the "List View" option in "File > Preferences > General".
The setting does not affect an open job.
Press Sheet
The "Press Sheet" tab lists all the press sheets in a job
or, if you have several product parts, the press sheets
in the selected product part. The parameters of the
sheets are also shown.
You can configure which parameters will be shown in
the "Press Sheet" tab as follows:
1. You can decide which columns will be shown by
selecting "Select Columns" in the context-sensitive
menu (see List Functionality, page 101). The follow-
ing window displays:

List Window ABC
The left column shows you all the parameters that

can be displayed in the "Press Sheet" tab. The right col-
umn lists the parameters that are actually shown.
To add parameters:
2. Select a parameter in the left column and click "Add
Column". The parameter appears in the right column
and is shown afterwards in the list window.
3. Below the right column are arrow keys that you can
use to define the order of the parameters going from
left to right. The first parameter then appears on the
left in the list window.
4. Quit the dialog by clicking "OK".

ABC List Window
5. Taking the parameters configured in the screen shot

above, you will now see the parameters in your list
window as follows:
Functionality
0
A double click on a row or a single click if the Press
Sheet Inspector is displayed
Opens that press sheet in the graphic window. The
same press sheet is marked in the Browser win-
dow. The Press Sheet Inspector displays in the
inspectors window so that you can edit the press
sheet.
play the context-sensitive menu in the "Press Sheet"
tab in the list window with a press sheet selected:
0
0
0
"Save Table as HTML File..."
You can save the listed information (tables) as a
HTML file (for checking purposes).
You can define preferences for the content of the
file in "File > Preferences > Reports". See Reports,

List Window ABC
In addition, you can attach report files, report

marks and GIF files (e.g. company logo) for a more
complete picture in the "Save Table as HTML File"
dialog that appears.
Report Header: Image data: You can define report
marks as comments for image data.
Footer: You can define report marks as footers.
0
"Save Table as PDF File..."
PDF file (for checking purposes). See previous item
"Save Table as HTML File...", page 105 for details.
0
"Print Table..."
Prints the listed information (tables) to a printer.
Folding Sheet
The "Folding Sheet" tab lists all the folding sheets in a
selected product part. The parameters of the sheets
are also shown.
the "Folding Sheet" tab as follows:

ABC List Window

can be displayed in the "Folding Sheet" tab. The right
column lists the parameters that are actually shown.
2. Continue as described in step 2 auf der page 104.To
add parameters:, page 104.
Functionality
0
A double click on a row or a single click if the Fold-
ing Sheet Inspector is displayed
Opens that folding sheet in the "Folding Sheet/
Assembly Block" tab in the graphic window. The
selected folding sheet is marked in the Browser
window. The Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspec-
tor displays in the inspectors window so that you
can edit the folding sheet.

List Window ABC

play the context-sensitive menu in the "Folding Sheet"
tab in the list window with a folding sheet selected:
0
inspectors window.
0
0
HTML file (for checking purposes). See "Save Table
as HTML File...", page 105 for details.
0
PDF file (for checking purposes). See "Save Table as
PDF File...", page 106 for details.
0
"Print Table..."
Page List
The "Page List" tab shows you all the pages that were
defined in the product part. The relevant parameters
are listed.
the "Page List" tab as follows:

ABC List Window


can be displayed in the "Page List" tab. The right col-
Functionality
0
A double click on a row or a single click if the
Page/1up Inspector is displayed
Displays that page or 1up in the "Page List" tab in
the graphic window. The selected page or 1up is
marked in the Browser window. The Page Inspec-
tor displays in the inspectors window so that you
can edit the page or 1up.

List Window ABC

play the context-sensitive menu in the "Page List" tab
in the list window with a page selected:
0
"Preview"
for details.
0
"Open with Acrobat"
page 49.
0
job. The pages in the job no longer have any
assigned content.
0
If you copied a page or 1up from a PDF file to the
clipboard in the "Contents" tab in the Browser win-
dow, you can paste it in anywhere you want.
You can also use this function in the graphic win-
dow in the context-sensitive menu in "Page List" >.
This function is really suitable for positioning cer-

tain pages/1ups several times. In the "Page List" tab
in the graphic window, select several pages/1ups
(command key and click) and paste the content of
the clipboard on the selected pages/1ups using the
0
"Assign Blank Page" (add a blank page)

ABC List Window
The page size defined in the scheme is used auto-

matically. The subsequent pages with their con-
tents shift back one page.
pages that were not in the PDF document must be
pasted to certain positions.
You can also use this function in the graphic win-
dow in the context-sensitive menu in "Page List" >.
0
0
HTML File...", page 105 for details.
0
"Print Table..."
Assigned
The "Assigned" tab shows you all the pages that were
imported and positioned in the current job. The rele-
vant parameters are listed.
the "Assigned" tab as follows:

List Window ABC

can be displayed in the "Assigned" tab. The right col-
Functionality
0
Positioning of pages by dragging-and-dropping
them to the graphic window. Position to the "Page
List" tab if you wish to position several pages. This
tab shows you all the pages defined in the product
part, making a direct check very simple.

ABC List Window
0
A double click on a row or a single click if the Doc-
ument Inspector is displayed
Displays that page or 1up in the "Document" tab in
marked in the Browser window. The Document
Inspector displays in the inspectors window so
that you can edit the page.
play the context-sensitive menu in the "Assigned" tab
in the list window with a PDF file selected:
0
0
"Preview"
for details.
0
"Open with Acrobat"
page 49.
0
0
"Reload Document"
0
"Assign Pages"
pages/1ups are assigned automatically to the next
blank pages in the job.
0

List Window ABC

0
0
"Print Table..."
In the List Functionality, page 101, you can print
the listed information (tables) to a printer.
The functions just named but without "Remove Docu-
ment from Job" and "Reload Document" are available
when you display the context-sensitive menu in the
"Assigned" tab in the list window with a page selected:
The following additional function is available:
0
Deletes assignment of the selected page(s)/1up(s)
in the job. The pages/1ups in the job no longer
have any assigned content.
Not assigned
The "Not assigned" tab shows you all the pages that
were imported to the current job but not yet posi-
tioned. The relevant parameters are listed.
the "Not assigned" tab as follows:

ABC List Window

can be displayed in the "Not assigned" tab. The right
column lists the parameters that are actually shown.
Functionality
0
Positioning of pages by dragging-and-dropping
them to the graphic window. Position to the "Page
List" tab if you wish to position several pages. This
tab shows you all the pages defined in the product
part, making a direct check very simple.

List Window ABC
0
A double click on a row or a single click if the Doc-
ument Inspector is displayed
Displays that page or 1up in the "Document" tab in
marked in the Browser window. The Document
Inspector displays in the inspectors window so
that you can edit the page.
play the context-sensitive menu in the "Not assigned"
tab in the list window with a PDF file selected:
0
0
"Preview"
for details.
0
"Open with Acrobat"
page 49.
0
0
"Reload Document"
0
"Assign Pages"
pages/1ups are assigned automatically to the next
blank pages in the job.

ABC List Window
0
0
0
"Print Table..."
In the List Functionality, page 101, you can print
the listed information (tables) to a printer.
The functions just named but without "Remove Docu-
ment from Job" and "Reload Document" are available
when you display the context-sensitive menu in the
"Not assigned" tab in the list window with a page
selected.

ABC Editors
11 Editors
General
0 The following parameters are common to all edi-
tors:
0 "Group": Group name in the tree structure in
the Browser window. See To create a group
folder, page 75 for details.
0 "Name": Name of the object. This appears in the
relevant group in the Browser window and in
the caption bar of the editor.
0
"Save": Saves the object. You cannot edit, i.e.
overwrite, default objects. You also cannot cre-
ate new default objects with them.
Resources that cannot be changed are locked.

This is indicated by a lock.
0
"Close": The editor closes. The object is not
saved.
0 "Reset": The object version last saved is loaded.
0 "New" button:
Some dialogs for loading "Resources" and
"Machines" have a "New" button. The editor
matches the object that you are about to load. It
allows you to create a new resource or machine
without having to quit the current dialog.
Example: In the Plate Template Editor > "Plate Tem-
plate" tab, click the folder button to the right of
the "Press" text box. The "Choose Press" dialog dis-

Editors ABC
plays. Click the "New" button (at bottom left in

window) to go to the press editor you want. You
can also decide to set up a new press if you wish.
Plate Template Editor

Use this editor if you wish to create/edit a plate tem-
plate that is saved as a resource in "Plate Templates".
Graphic Area
Graphic display of the plate template:
0
Plate: dark gray
0
Paper: light gray
0
Subject (area of paper with print data): purple
0
Ink zones: broken vertical lines
0
Imaging window: within blue-and-white frame
0
Baseline: blue line
0
Gripper margin: reddish-brown strip below base-
line
Display and input:
0 The "X", "Y" coordinates show the current cursor
position. The bottom left corner of the plate is the
origin. The coordinates are shown in the set unit
of measure.
0 "W", "H": The width and height of a frame you cre-
ate are shown in these boxes.
To select an object. Click an object that can be

selected. This object then has a yellow frame and you
can move it holding down the mouse button.

ABC Editors
To zoom up the entire graphic. A "+" appears in the

magnifying glass. Hold down the "Alt" key to zoom
down. A "-" appears in the magnifying glass.
Hand tool: Lets you move scaled-up objects into the
view frame. Hold down the space bar while doing so.
To set a measuring point and create a frame: This
tool lets you set measuring points or create a frame
and read off the values in the read-only boxes on the
left. As an alternative to the tool: "command key +
Shift key"
User-defined dimensions:
This tool lets you measure from one defined edge
(e.g. paper edge, page edge, etc.) to another defined
edge.
Example:
You are going to measure the distance between the
paper edge and the beginning of the subject.
0 Move the mouse pointer to the paper edge.
0 The starting edge is shown as a red bar.
0 Hold down the mouse button and drag the
mouse pointer to the beginning of the subject.

0
The target edge is shown as a green bar.
0
Let go of the mouse button.
0
The distance from the page edge to the paper
edge is shown along a line between the red and
green bar.
Note: Dimensioning in the following tool (View
Properties) must be enabled.
0
Use the shortcut "Alt + click" to delete the dimen-
sions.

Editors ABC
View Properties:
You can use this tool to change the graphic display.
Working with layers, see View Properties and
Enable/Disable Layers, page 86.
0
"View" tab: For showing or hiding the various
objects.
0
"Dimensions" tab: For showing or hiding the
dimensions of various objects.
0
"Grid" tab: For showing or hiding a grid and set-
ting its color.
List box with zoom factors.
Plate Template Tab

When you go to define a plate template, you should
load a press that is already defined (see the
section Sheetfed Press Editor, page 1172 and
section Web Press Editor, page 1173). You will find
the presses in the "Machines" tab in the "Jobs &
Resources > Resources & Machines" menu.
Plate Dimension
0 " Press": Click the folder button beside this box to
load a press. You set up this press beforehand in
the "Machines" tab in the "Jobs & Resources >
Resources & Machines" menu. If this is not the
case, you can also load a standard press included
in the shipment.
0 "Width", "Height": The height and width are
already defined as parameters and are automati-
cally set when you load the press. You can, how-
ever, change the parameters in this box.

ABC Editors
Paper Definitions
To be able to follow the definitions below, bear in
mind the press parameters that you defined in
"Machines".
Some of the following parameters are computed from
the press data.
0
"Max. paper width":
Max. paper width = plate width - (2 x print margin)
0
"Max. paper height": In the definition of the max.
paper height, it is assumed that the end of paper is
the same as the end of print (related to the plate
start).
The following is applicable for the max. paper
height:
Max. paper height = end of paper - baseline
Baseline is calculated as follows:
Baseline = Lead edge of print - gripper margin
When calculating the end of paper, remember
that the "Tail Edge of Print" value refers to the end
of the plate. This means that the end of paper is
calculated as follows:
End of paper = Plate height - tail edge of print
To summarize, the max. paper height is defined as
follows:
Max. paper height = Plate height - tail edge of print
- lead edge of print + gripper margin
0
"Baseline":
Baseline = Lead edge of print - gripper margin
0
"Gripper Margin": This value is already defined as a
machine parameter and is automatically set when

Editors ABC
you load the press. You can, however, change it in

this box.
0
"X Offset": Horizontal offset of the paper in rela-
tion to the plate.
Output
0
"Output parameters": You already defined the out-
put parameter set beforehand as a resource. These
output parameters are used in this box.
The selected output parameter set is set by default
for output of the job.
Imaging Window
0
"Width", "Height": Size of the imaging window
"Width": Slow scan direction
"Height": Fast scan direction
0
The origin of the imaging window ("X", "Y") is at
the bottom left.
Note: If you want your output to be centered, make
2 sure that the imaging window is centered with
regard to the plate template. Set the position of
the imaging window with X, Y values.
Marks Tab
The "Marks List" contains all the marks that you posi-
tioned on the plate template. The list is sorted by "Sub-
ject", "Paper", "Plate". Within one group, the mark last
positioned is at the top. The list is then in the same
order as for printing.

ABC Editors
This lets you display the "Marks" resource where you

can select a mark. The mark is positioned at the bot-
tom left of the graphic (origin) and is added to the
"Marks List".
Replace the selected mark by another one. The
selected mark is overwritten.
Delete selected mark.
Moves a selected mark up in the list (sorting func-

tion). The printing order is also defined.
Moves a selected mark down in the list (sorting func-
tion). The printing order is also defined.
0
"Group/Name": This displays the resources group
and the name of the selected mark.
0
"Color": Separations which will have the mark.
0
"Reference Point": Reference point on which the
mark will be placed. The hotspot of the mark
snaps accurately into position above this spot. The
reference points appear when you move a mark in
the graphic, holding down the mouse button.
Depending on what is set as the parent, the refer-
ence points for paper, plate or subject are shown.
0
"Position X, Y": Mark coordinate relative to the
selected reference point. Refer also to "Change"
button, page 976.
0 "Scaling X, Y": Scaling factor of the mark (mini-
mum = 10%, maximum = 500%).
Color control bars that are used for ink zone con-
trol may not be scaled in X direction. See also the
"Proportions" button, page 976.

Editors ABC
0
"Orientation" of the mark.
0
"Parent": A mark is assigned to the paper, plate or
subject. If you change the size or position of one of
these objects, the position of the assigned mark is
matched automatically.
Expert Mode:
0
"Foreground": The mark is either on top of (= fore-
ground) or below the page content.
0
You can assign each mark to a certain surface
(front, back) or to "All Surfaces" using the "Surface"
list box.
0
"Width", "Height": Shows the mark size.
0
"Clippath": This parameter lets you define the part
of a mark that can be cut out. You can do this in
one of the following two ways:
a) You define the margins in "Clippath". When you
click a mark with the right mouse button, a yellow
rectangle surrounding the mark appears. The
margins defined refer to this rectangle.
0
"Margin left": A value of "0" corresponds to the
left margin of the rectangle surrounding the
mark. A value you enter is the distance starting
from the left margin and extending into the
mark. This part of the mark is cut out when
you hit the Tab key or click another text box.
0
"Margin bottom", "Right", "Top": See "Margin
left". You can cut the mark accordingly from
the bottom, right and top margin.
b) You can draw a bounding box within the mark.
This bounding box surrounds the part of the mark
that will remain after the other part is cut out.

ABC Editors
To do this, press the command key + Shift key and

create the box holding down the mouse button.
First let go of the mouse button and then the com-
mand + Shift keys. Some of the bounding box
must be within the selected mark.
The function is only applied when you click this but-

ton.
You can find other tips in the User's Guide.
Marks Resources Tab

In this tab, you can drag-and-drop marks in the
graphic to the position you want. You will see refer-
ence points for paper and subject if you move an
object in the graphic holding down the mouse but-
ton.
All reference points (paper, plate, subject) are shown
while you drag-and-drop from the marks resources. A
mark relates to a certain reference point (parent)
when you position it on this reference point. Paper is
always taken as the reference if you do not place the
mark on a reference point.
Only the reference points of the relevant parent are
shown when you move a mark.
You can find more details in Selected Mark,
page 972.
Notes on Marks
0 The "TilingLine_Horizontal" and
"TilingLine_Vertical" marks must have "Paper" as
their parent as tiling will not work if they don't.

Editors ABC
0
In tiling, the start of imaging can be defined by
setting the "TilingLine_Horizontal" and
"TilingLine_Vertical" lines:
a) The outer tiling line is within the paper: In this
case, the plate defines the start of imaging. The til-
ing line tiles the sheet and the appropriate tile
numbers are displayed.
b) The outer tiling line is outside the paper or at
the start of it: In this case, imaging starts at the
position of the tiling line. The sheet is not divided
by this tiling line.
0
The "TilingRegister" and "TilingText" marks are set
automatically.
Loading the "Plate Templates" Resource to the Job

This is where you load the resource to the job:
0
Job Assistant > "Printing Plates"
0
Product Part Inspector > "Plates"
Folding Scheme Editor

Use this editor if you wish to create/edit a folding
scheme that is saved as a resource in "Schemes".
You have a list box at the top right in the "Matrix"
group that you can use to create or edit a scheme for
web offset. You can choose between sheetfed offset
and web offset (up to 8 webs). A list box displays at the
bottom of the window beside the "Save" button if you
have two or more webs, allowing you to switch
between the webs. To start the "Fold Assistant for
Web", click the button in "Scheme Generated from
Folding Rule". See Fold Assistant for Web, page 1128
for details.

ABC Editors
For a three-dimensional view of a folding scheme, see

also Folding Sheet Animation, page 1225.
Folding Scheme Data

0
"Folding Scheme Name": Exact name of a fold type
listed in Heidelberg's fold type catalog that will be
used in this scheme.
The folding scheme name is saved for automatic
finishing (default at the folding machine).
The folding scheme name is defined in the stan-
dard schemes. It should only be edited if special
defaults will be defined at the folding machine.
0
"Folding Type (CIP4)": Folding using the CIP4 fold
type catalog automatically displays for the default
schemes for finishing in the workflow.
0
"Comment": This is where you can enter com-
ments about the scheme. They will not be evalu-
ated.
0
"Center Offset": Normally (symmetric binding), the
value is "0" (see Center offset below). The system
sets implausible values for the center offset back
to "0".
0
"Insert at Index": The next sheet is inserted after
this number of pages (e.g. for saddlestitching).
This box and the center offset each base their cal-
culations on the other. In addition, the pages
before the insertion point are darker and the
pages after it lighter.

Editors ABC
Center offset
What is center offset?

In asymmetric binding with fold-out pages, center off-
set defines in which fold binding will be.
The purpose of center offset is to calculate page num-
bering and creeping correctly. Creeping is not used
on fold-out pages.
When is center offset used?

Center offset is used only with products that have the
following criteria:
0
The scheme is single-lined.
0
There are fold-out pages. In other words, binding
is asymmetric with regard to the folding scheme.
0
The selected binding method is saddle-stitching or
mixed binding. Creeping must be calculated cor-
rectly.

ABC Editors
Example: A book will have the following folding

sheet:
Folding scheme F04-01_ui_2x1
Pagination and orientation

Editors ABC
This is to contain a sheet with one fold-out page. The

sheet has the following folding scheme:
Folding scheme F06-04_ui_3x1_P (not a standard scheme)
Pagination and orientation
The left leaf can be folded out on this sheet. Binding

must be in fold 2.
The "Center Offset" parameter defines in which fold
binding will be.
Calculation of the center offset

1. The reference point for center offset is the theoretical
center of the scheme. You determine the theoretical
center of the scheme by dividing the number of all
the sheet pages (front and back) by two.
In our example, the theoretical center of the sheet
with the fold-out page is "3".
2. Now count the front and back pages from left to right
until you come to the fold where binding will be.

ABC Editors
In our example binding is in fold 2. The number of

front and back pages until fold 2 is "4".
3. The center offset is the difference between the num-
ber of these pages and the theoretical center.
In our example, the value is "1" (4-3). The center offset
is positive in this case. This means that the fold where
binding will be is to the right of the theoretical cen-
ter.
0
Positive center offset: The fold is to the right of the
theoretical center.
0
Negative center offset: The fold is to the left of the
theoretical center.
Matrix
0
"Columns": Number of columns in the scheme
0
"Rows": Number of rows in the scheme
0
List box for printing process (sheetfed or web with
the number of webs)
0
"Back by Tumble": The default setting is that the
back is created by work-and-turn. You must check
this option if you wish to create the back by work-
and-tumble.
Customize
0
"Generate Back": You generated the page numbers
and orientation for the front. The page numbers
and orientation for the back are generated auto-
matically if you check "Generate Back".
0
"Use Prototype": You have an imposition scheme
with many identical 1ups.

Editors ABC
0
Front: With "Use Prototype", you can copy the
number and orientation of the bottom left 1up
that is marked "(1,1)" to all 1ups on the front.
0
Back: With "Use Prototype", you can copy the
number and orientation of the 1up that is
marked "(1,1)" to all 1ups on the back.
Sheetwise: The prototype is the bottom right
1up.
Perfector: The prototype is the top left 1up.
0
"Push Together": This function is used if you wish
to exclude positions from pagination in the fold-
ing scheme and yet keep numbering consecutive.
This is required, for example, when only parts of a
web are used in printing (see Push Together
below).
Push Together
A press with two webs will now be used as an example
of how you proceed with "Push Together". The second
web width is half the size of the first web.
1. In the "Matrix" group, create a 2x2 scheme and select
"Double Web Press".
2. Enter folding rule "X1Y1".

ABC Editors
All other settings remain as they are. You then have

the following page setup:
Web 1 without 'Push Together'
Web 2 without 'Push Together'
3. Web 2 is half as wide as web 1. This means that pages

14, 3, 13 and 4 would not be positioned on paper in
the scheme. Set these page numbers to "0".

Editors ABC
4. Click "Push Together". The page numbers are now cor-

rected. The correct scheme is now as follows:
Web 1 with 'Push Together'
Web 2 with 'Push Together'
Scheme Generated from Folding Rule

In principle, page numbering and page orientation
always depend on all the other parameters in this
group.
0 "Folding Rule": You can type in the folding rule
manually in this box (see the Folding rule,
page 1119 below).
0 Fold Assistant: Start the Folding Assistant by click-
ing the icon on the right. The Fold Assistant is a

ABC Editors
graphic tool for creating folding rules (see the Fold

Assistant / folding sheet animation, page 1124
below).
0
"Pagination":
0
"Normal": The pages of the product you want to
fold are numbered consecutively like a book.
All the pages have the same orientation.
0
"Calendar": The pages of the product you want
to fold are numbered consecutively like a book.
Every second page has the opposite orienta-
tion.
0
"Accordion Fold": This type of pagination only
affects single-lined schemes. Viewed from page
1, page numbering is to the right and circular

Lingua

Benvenuto in Scribd!

Prinect Signa Station - Reference En

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione:

Data di caricamento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Descrizione:

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Prinect Signa Station - Reference En

Caricato da

Descrizione:

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Titoli correlati

Prinect Signa Station - Reference

Edition March 2010

Before You Start ...

2 The Heidelberg User Interface

Prinect Signa Station Reference III

IV Edition March 2010

Paper (Printing Materials) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

4 Preferences / Getting Started

Prinect Signa Station Reference V

VI Edition March 2010

7 Resources and Machines

Prinect Signa Station Reference VII

VIII Edition March 2010

Tile Front / Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

Prinect Signa Station Reference IX

Details in the Inspectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

X Edition March 2010

Master Page Types and Trimmed Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Prinect Signa Station Reference XI

XII Edition March 2010

Clip path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93

Prinect Signa Station Reference XIII

XIV Edition March 2010

Text Mark Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38

Prinect Signa Station Reference XV

Format Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-56

XVI Edition March 2010

Sheetfed Press Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-72

12 Menus in Prinect Signa Station

Prinect Signa Station Reference XVII

Preferences ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15

XVIII Edition March 2010

Background Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23

Prinect Signa Station Reference XIX

"StationNumber" Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

XX Edition March 2010

Automatic Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12

15 Drag & Drop

Prinect Signa Station Reference XXI

Before You Start ...

About This Documentation

What you should already know

Prinect Signa Station Reference XXIII

Symbols and Styles

3 into consideration to protect the user from injury.

Attention: Contains information that must be taken

1 into consideration to prevent damage to hardware or

XXIV Edition March 2010

Note: Contains important general or additional infor-

Interference to Monitors by Magnetic Fields

Open Source Software

Prinect Signa Station Reference XXV

Software, in line with applicable provisions, from

XXVI Edition March 2010

What's New since Prinect Signa Station 4.5

New Functions and Enhancements